JP7709768B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Some conventional gaming machines have a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state in which it is easier to start winning than in the normal gaming state, and technology has been proposed to provide gaming effects that correspond to each gaming state (for example, see Patent Document 1 below).

JP 2015-6575 A

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above still had room for improvement in terms of the entertainment value of playing in the time-saving gaming state.

In view of the above problems, the present invention aims to provide an amusement machine that can further increase the enjoyment of playing the amusement machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a game machine information notification command that transmits a response command to the main control means when the game machine information notification command is received from the main control means, and performs processing related to subtraction and addition of the number of playable virtual game media. The game machine information notification command is generated by controlling the transition of game states, including a first normal state, a second normal state, a specific game state advantageous to the player, and progress and stop of the game accompanied by the provision of virtual game media, and a processing related to the subtraction and addition of the number of playable virtual game media. and a virtual game medium number control means for performing a command to receive the response command and transmitting game state information based on the game state to a connected card unit, and when the main control means determines that a communication failure has occurred when it determines that a situation in which the response command cannot be received has occurred a predetermined number of times in succession, it is capable of performing a standby process after transmitting a communication failure occurrence command to the image display device, and the special game state which can be generated by stopping a predetermined pattern on the first special pattern display means in the first normal state and the second normal state, and the specific game state which can be generated by stopping and displaying a specific pattern on the second special pattern display means in the specific game state are provided. and a specific special game state which can be generated by the establishment of a specific condition, and in the first normal state, when a special symbol stops on the first special symbol display means, the first normal state can be maintained, and in the first normal state, when the predetermined symbol stops on the first special symbol display means, the game can transition to the first normal state or the second normal state after the special game state ends depending on the predetermined symbol which caused the special game state, and the special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and in the second normal state, when the first special symbol stops on the first special symbol display means, when the second special symbol stops, a transition can be made to the first normal state, when the second special symbol stops, a transition can be made to a first specific game state among the specific game states, and when in the second normal state, when the specified symbol stops on the first special symbol display means, a transition can be made to a second specific game state among the specific game states after the special game state ends in accordance with the specified symbol that has become the special game state, and a time period during which the symbol changes on the second special symbol display means in the first specific game state is shorter than a time period during which the symbol changes on the second special symbol display means in the second specific game state .

In the above invention, it is also characterized in that after the specific special game state in the first specific game state ends, it is possible to transition to the second specific game state.

This invention can further increase the excitement of playing with gaming machines.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 and the card unit 9 of the first to sixth embodiments. This is an enlarged view of the second large prize opening 17 in the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1 and the card unit 9 of the first to sixth embodiments. FIG. These are the main control board 110 and frame control board 160 of the first to sixth embodiments, and covers 110c and 160c that cover them. A block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a card unit 9 in the first to sixth embodiments. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing the operation of inserting a bill 200 into the card unit 9 of the first to sixth embodiments, and the operation of dispensing a bill from the card unit 9. A diagram showing the lending operation in the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing the ejection and insertion operations of a card 201 in the card unit 9 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the game flow of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the corresponding relationships between the presentation modes, game states, and background images of the gaming machines 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the sequence of command transmission between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the sequence of transmitting gaming machine information notification data from the frame control board 160 to the card unit 9 in the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the sequence of transmitting gaming machine information notification data and counting notification data from the frame control board 160 to the card unit 9 in the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the sequence of transmitting loan notification data and loan acceptance result response data between the frame control board 160 and the card unit 9 in the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the power-on operation of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a win/loss determination table for the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a big win symbol and small win symbol determination table for the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a table for determining special losing symbols and normal losing symbols of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a setting table for setting the end of a special game in the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a setting table for when a special losing symbol stops in the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 shows special game control tables for big wins and small wins in the gaming machines 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 is a control table for opening and closing a big prize opening for a big win in the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 shows a control table for opening and closing a large prize opening for a small win and a control table for opening and closing a specific area for a small win of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. This is a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in the normal state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. This is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol for the low base time-saving state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. This is a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol for the high base time-saving state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 shows a pre-judgment table for a jackpot lottery for a first special symbol in the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a pre-determination table for the big win lottery for the second special symbol of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the image display device 31 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 shows an ordinary symbol determination table and an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 1 shows an auxiliary game control table and an auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. A diagram showing the memory area of the main RAM 110b of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 11 is a flowchart of the main processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 11 is a flowchart of the initialization process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 11 is a flowchart of an initialization process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the third to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a gaming machine information notification process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the power supply interruption monitoring process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the input control process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the first start hole detection SW input processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of specific area detection SW input processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the special chart special electricity control processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the small win game processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the second type jackpot game transition process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the normal power control processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the main processing of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the initial setting process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the third to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the game ball number control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the timer update process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of an error determination process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing the display of the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the response processing of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a gaming machine information notification process of the gaming ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a gaming machine information data transmission process of the gaming ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the counting process of the game ball number control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the process of determining whether a game ball number transition condition is met by the game ball number control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an operation information storage area of the game ball number RAM 180b of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments and an example of updating the operation information storage area. 13 is a flowchart of the counting notification process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the lending control process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the first and second embodiments. This figure shows a seated lamp light color determination table, a seated background color determination table, an away lamp light color determination table, and an away background color determination table for the gaming machines 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the main processing of the launch control unit 170 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the launch control process of the launch control unit 170 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 11 is a flowchart of a main process of the card unit control board 90 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a banknote input detection process of the card unit control board 90 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a card input detection process of the card unit control board 90 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the ball count update process of the card unit control board 90 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a lending process of the card unit control board 90 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a response confirmation process of the card unit control board 90 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of a card ejection process of the card unit control board 90 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information analysis process of the card unit control board 90 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the main processing of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the command analysis process of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the command analysis process of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the command analysis process of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in sea mode in the normal state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special pattern in sea mode in a low base time-saving state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special pattern in the ground mode in the low base state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special pattern in the high base time-saving state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the second special pattern of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the variable presentation pattern determination process of the presentation control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the training mode notification effect control process of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the special game effect control processing of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing the normal background setting table and the special background setting table of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the background image display control process of the performance control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 11 is a flowchart of a main process of a general control unit 141 according to the first to sixth embodiments. 11 is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process and a V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141 according to the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen for normal variable effects in the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen of a normal reach presentation of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a roulette presentation screen of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen of the SP reach performance of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen for a battle presentation of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing detailed screen examples of the battle effects of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen during a big win presentation of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example of a screen during a high base time-saving state of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. A figure showing an example screen of the training mode presentation of the gaming machine 1 of the first to sixth embodiments. 13 is a flowchart of the initialization process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of the initial setting process of the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a game notification control process of a game ball count control unit 180 of a gaming machine 1 of a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a game notification control process of a game ball count control unit 180 of a gaming machine 1 of a fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a game notification control process of a game ball count control unit 180 of a gaming machine 1 of a fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a game notification control process of a game ball count control unit 180 of a gaming machine 1 of a sixth embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Overview of Gaming Machine 1)
Unlike well-known pachinko gaming machines, gaming machine 1 does not use a gaming ball supply mechanism or a gaming ball discharge mechanism of an island facility, but is an enclosed gaming machine that stores a predetermined number of gaming balls, plays by firing the stored gaming balls into a playing area, collects the gaming balls after playing, and then fires the collected gaming balls again to play.

(Basic Configuration of Gaming Machine 1)
First, the basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 1 to Fig. 4. Fig. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 and the card unit 9 of the present invention. Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of the second large winning opening 17 of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1 and the card unit 9. Fig. 4 is a diagram showing the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160 on the rear side of the gaming machine 1, as well as the covers 110c and 160c that cover them.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 3, the gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 60 and a rotatably supported glass frame 50. The outer frame 60 is provided with a gaming board 2 having a gaming area 6 in which gaming balls flow down. The gaming area 6 has a left area 6L to the left of the center, and a right area 6R to the right of the center.

One end of the glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51, and the other end of the glass frame 50 is provided with a lock mechanism. The lock mechanism of the glass frame 50 can be unlocked with a special key, and by unlocking it, the hinge mechanism 51 can be swung to open the play area 6. The glass frame 50 is provided with a door open detection SW81c (not shown).

The glass frame 50 is provided with a performance button 35 that can be pressed, and the performance button 35 is provided with a performance button detection SW 35a. When the performance button detection SW 35a detects the operation of the performance button 35 by the player, it outputs predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. Therefore, the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 by operating the performance button 35.

A cross key 39 that can be pressed is provided to the left of the effect button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a left cursor key 39B, a down cursor key 39C, a right cursor key 39D, and a center cursor key 39E, which are respectively provided with a cross key detection SW 39a, a cross key detection SW 39b, a cross key detection SW 39c, a cross key detection SW 39d, and a cross key detection SW 39e. When each cross key detection SW detects the player's operation of the cross key 39, it outputs specified information to the gaming machine 1. Thus, the player can input specified information to the gaming machine 1 by operating the cross key 39.

The glass frame 50 is provided with an operating handle 3 that can be rotated to launch game balls into the game area 6. The operating handle 3 is provided with a touch sensor 3a. The touch sensor 3a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 3. When the player rotates the operating handle 3, the launch volume 3b provided near the operating handle 3 also rotates, and the firing member directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a rotates with a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the launch volume 3b.

The ball-feeding solenoid 4b, located near the operating handle 3, sends the game balls stored in the gaming machine 1 one by one to the firing member directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a. The touch sensor 3a, launch volume 3b, launching solenoid 4a, and ball-feeding solenoid 4b perform the operations related to the above-mentioned launching operation under the control of the launch control unit 170 in the frame control board 160.

The game ball sent to the striking member is struck between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the striking member, passes through the ball return prevention member 5c and enters the game area 6. Between the rails 5a and 5b, there are provided a shot ball sensor 2a, a foul ball sensor 2b, a small ball sensor 81a, and an iron ball sensor 81b (all not shown).

When the fired ball sensor 2a detects that the game ball shot between the rails 5a and 5b has passed the firing detection point at the top of the rail 5b, it outputs a firing signal. When the foul ball sensor 2b detects that the game ball shot between the rails 5a and 5b has returned without reaching the game area 6, it outputs a foul signal. When the small ball sensor 81a detects that a small ball has been shot between the rails 5a and 5b, it outputs a small ball detection signal. When the iron ball sensor 81b detects that an iron ball has been shot between the rails 5a and 5b, it outputs an iron ball detection signal.

Audio output devices 32, which are speakers, are provided on the left and right sides of the glass frame 50. The audio output devices 32 provide effects such as music and sound effects in accordance with the progress of the game. A fourth performance lighting device 340d and two fifth performance lighting devices 340e are provided near the two audio output devices 32. The fourth performance lighting device 340d and the fifth performance lighting device 340e each have a fourth lamp 34d and a fifth lamp 34e, which are full-color LEDs. The fourth performance lighting device 340d and the fifth performance lighting device 340e perform the light emission operation of the fourth lamp 34d and the fifth lamp 34e under the control of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the performance control board 120, and provide game effects.

Inside the play area 6 of the game board 2, there are a regular winning gate 12, a regular symbol gate 13, a first start gate 14, a second start gate 15, a first big winning gate 16, a second big winning gate 17, and an image display device 31.

Three general winning openings 12 are provided below the game area 6L. A general winning opening detection switch 12a is provided in each general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the entry of a game ball into a general winning opening 12, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player.

A first starting hole 14 is provided in the lower center of the play area 6 of the play board 2. A second starting hole 15 is provided in the right part of the play area 6 of the play board 2. When a game ball is shot toward the left area 6L of the play area 6 (left hit), the game ball can enter the first starting hole 14, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 15. When a game ball is shot toward the right area 6R of the play area 6 (right hit), the game ball can enter the second starting hole 15, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 14.

The first start hole 14 is provided with a first start hole detection SW 14a. When the first start hole detection SW 14a detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 14, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player. The second start hole 15 is provided with a second start hole detection SW 15a. When the second start hole detection SW 15a detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 15, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player. Note that the number of game balls awarded for the entry of game balls into the first start hole 14 and the second start hole 15 may be the same or different. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 is detected, various random number values are obtained to be used for various processes related to the game, including the big win lottery.

The second starting port 15 is provided with two movable pieces 15b and a starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c. The second starting port 15 changes between two states by the operation of the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c: a closed state in which the entry of game balls is restricted, and an open state in which the entry of game balls is permitted. Specifically, the second starting port 15 is controlled by the operation of the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c between a closed state in which the movable piece 15b becomes approximately vertical, restricting the entry of game balls, and an open state in which the movable piece 15b becomes approximately horizontal, allowing the entry of game balls.

The second starting hole 15 can also vary the ease with which the game ball can win by varying the time that it is open. Details will be described later, but the longer the time that the second starting hole 15 is open, the more opportunities there are for the game ball to win, and therefore the easier it is to win.

A normal symbol gate 13 is provided in the upper right corner of the game area 6 of the game board 2. A gate detection switch 13a is provided in the normal symbol gate 13. When the gate detection switch 13a detects the passage of a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13, a random number value for judgment, etc., is obtained for performing the normal symbol lottery described below.

A first large prize opening 16 is provided in the lower right area of the game area 6 of the game board 2. The first large prize opening 16 is provided with a first large prize opening detection switch 16a, a first large prize opening opening door 16b, and a first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 16c. The first large prize opening 16 changes between two states by the operation of the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 16c: a closed state in which the entry of game balls is restricted, and an open state in which the entry of game balls is permitted.

More specifically, when the first large prize opening opening solenoid 16c is turned off, the first large prize opening opening door 16b becomes approximately parallel to the surface of the game board 2, so that the first large prize opening 16 is in a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win. Also, when the first large prize opening opening solenoid 16c is turned on, the first large prize opening 16 is in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win, so that the first large prize opening opening door 16b becomes approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game board 2.

When the first large prize opening detection SW 16a detects that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 16, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player. The open state of the first large prize opening 16 changes to a closed state when a specified number of game balls have entered, as described below, or when a predetermined opening time has elapsed.

A second large prize opening 17 is provided in the area to the right of the play area 6 of the game board 2. The second large prize opening 17 is provided with a second large prize opening detection switch 17a, a second large prize opening opening door 17b, and a second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 17c. The second large prize opening 17 changes between two states by the operation of the second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 17c: a closed state in which the second large prize opening opening door 17b restricts the entry of game balls, and an open state in which the entry of game balls is permitted.

Specifically, when the second large prize opening opening solenoid 17c is turned off, the second large prize opening opening door 17b becomes approximately parallel to the surface of the game board 2, so that the second large prize opening 17 is in a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win. When the second large prize opening opening solenoid 17c is turned on, the second large prize opening opening door 17b becomes approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game board 2, so that the second large prize opening 17 is in an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to win.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second large prize opening 17 is provided with a specific area 19B, a slide member 19C, and a second large prize opening outlet 19E. The slide member 19C changes into two states by the operation of the specific area opening/closing solenoid 18d: a retreated state in which it is stored at the back of a gap provided in the internal wall 19 of the second large prize opening, and an advanced state in which it advances to the front of the gap.

Specifically, the slide member 19C advances when the specific area opening/closing solenoid 18d is turned on, and retracts when the specific area opening/closing solenoid 18d is turned off. The specific area 19B is in a closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter when the slide member 19C advances, and in an open state where it is easy for the game ball to enter when the slide member 19C retracts.

When the slide member 19C is in the forward position, a game ball passing over the specific area 19B can only be discharged through the second large prize opening discharge port 19E, but when the slide member 19C is in the backward position, the game ball can be discharged through the specific area 19B. A game ball discharged through the second large prize opening discharge port 19E is detected by the second large prize opening detection SW 17a. A game ball discharged through the specific area 19B is detected by the specific area detection SW 18a. Regardless of which detection SW is used to detect the game ball, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player.

An outlet 11 is provided at the bottom center of the play area 6 of the play board 2. If a game ball shot into the play area 6 does not enter any of the general winning hole 12, the first starting hole 14, the second starting hole 15, the first large winning hole 16, and the second large winning hole 17, it is ejected from the play area 6 through the outlet 11.

An image display device 31 is provided in the center of the game area 6. The image display device 31 displays effect images according to the progress of the game, and displays customer waiting effect images during waiting when no game is being played. As effect images displayed according to the progress of the game, a left pattern 36L, a middle pattern 36C, a right pattern 36R (hereinafter referred to as "decorative pattern 36"), and a fourth pattern 36Z are displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The decorative pattern 36 and the fourth pattern 36Z notify the same judgment result as the jackpot judgment result indicated by the special patterns of the first special pattern display device 20 and the second special pattern display device 21.

In addition, a radio wave detection SW19a (not shown) is provided at the bottom center of the play area 6. When the radio wave detection SW19a detects radio waves, it outputs a radio wave detection signal.

Outside the play area 6 of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol reserved display device 22, a second special symbol reserved display device 23, a normal symbol display device 24, and a normal symbol reserved display device 25 are provided.

The first special pattern display device 20 is composed of a seven-segment LED, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 14 of the play area 6, the LED turns on and off to display the fluctuating special patterns and the stopped special patterns indicating the results of the jackpot lottery. Similarly, the second special pattern display device 21 is composed of a seven-segment LED, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 15 of the play area 6, the LED turns on and off to display the fluctuating special patterns and the stopped special patterns indicating the results of the jackpot lottery. Hereinafter, the special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 20 will be referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern displayed by the second special pattern display device 21 will be referred to as the "second special pattern."

When a new change of the first special pattern or the second special pattern cannot be started, such as during a change of the special pattern or during a jackpot game (special game), the change display of the special pattern is put on hold under a specified condition. The first special pattern reserved indicator 22 displays the number of waiting change displays for the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number"). The first special pattern reserved indicator 22 is composed of two LEDs, one on the left and one on the right, and displays the reserved number of the first special pattern according to their display mode. Specifically, when the reserved number of the first special pattern is one, only the left LED is lit, when the reserved number of the first special pattern is two, only the right LED is lit, when the reserved number of the first special pattern is three, the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the reserved number of the first special pattern is four, the two left and right LEDs flash.

Similarly, the second special pattern reserved indicator 23 displays the reserved number of the second special pattern. The second special pattern reserved indicator 23 is composed of two LEDs, one on the left and one on the right, and displays the reserved number of the second special pattern according to their display mode. Specifically, when the reserved number of the second special pattern is one, only the left LED is lit, when the reserved number of the second special pattern is two, only the right LED is lit, when the reserved number of the second special pattern is three, the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the reserved number of the second special pattern is four, both the left and right LEDs flash.

The normal symbol display device 24 is composed of a single LED, and when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 in the game area 6, the single LED turns on and off to display the normal symbol fluctuations and the lottery result. If it is not possible to start a new normal symbol fluctuation display, such as when the normal symbol is fluctuating, the normal symbol fluctuation display is put on hold under specified conditions.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 25 is composed of two LEDs, one on the left and one on the right, and displays the number of reserved normal symbols according to their display mode. Specifically, when there is one reserved normal symbol, only the left LED is lit, when there are two reserved normal symbols, only the right LED is lit, when there are three reserved normal symbols, the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when there are four reserved normal symbols, both the left and right LEDs flash.

A first performance drive device 330a, a second performance drive device 330b, and a third performance drive device 330c are provided on the periphery of the play area 6 of the play board 2. The first performance drive device 330a has a first movable role piece 33a. The second performance drive device 330b has a second movable role piece 33b. The third performance drive device 330c has a third movable role piece 33c.

The first performance drive unit 330a, the second performance drive unit 330b, and the third performance drive unit 330c operate the first movable role piece 33a, the second movable role piece 33b, and the third movable role piece 33c under the control of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the performance control board 120, to perform game performances.

The first movable part 33a performs a rocking motion near the origin position and a drop movement to the center of the play area 6 to perform a preview performance indicating that the performance has a high chance of winning. The second movable part 33b performs a rocking motion near the origin position and a sliding movement to the left to the center of the play area 6 to perform a preview performance indicating that the performance has a high chance of winning. The third movable part 33c performs a rocking motion near the origin position and a sliding movement to the lower right to the center of the play area 6 to perform a preview performance indicating that the performance has a high chance of winning. These rocking motions, drop movements, and slide movements can be performed alone or in combination, and the more they are performed in combination, the higher the chance of winning. There are also multiple timings for the drop movement and slide movement, and the chance of winning varies depending on the timing of the movement.

As shown in FIG. 1, the first performance lighting device 340a is provided at the center of the first movable part 33a. The second performance lighting device 340b is provided at the center of the second movable part 33b. The third performance lighting device 340c is provided at the center of the third movable part 33c. The first performance lighting device 340a, the second performance lighting device 340b, and the third performance lighting device 340c are provided with the first lamp 34a, the second lamp 34b, and the third lamp 34c, which are full-color LEDs, respectively.

The first performance lighting device 340a, the second performance lighting device 340b, and the third performance lighting device 330c perform the light emission operation of the first lamp 34a, the second lamp 34b, and the third lamp 34c under the control of the lamp/drive control unit 150 of the performance control board 120, to perform the game performance.

A game ball count display 84 is provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2. The game ball count display 84 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. The game ball count display 84 displays information such as the number of game balls and error messages based on the display data transmitted from the frame control board 160.

Specifically, the game ball count display 84 displays the number of game balls currently held by the gaming machine 1. In the cases described below, the game ball count display 84 displays the number of game balls obtained by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the currently displayed number of game balls.

The game ball count display 84 displays the number of game balls currently displayed minus a predetermined value when a game ball is released and when the ball count information of the gaming machine 1 is transferred to the card unit 9. Specifically, the game ball count display 84 displays the number of game balls displayed minus one each time a game ball is released. In addition, when the ball count of the gaming machine 1 is transferred to the card unit 9, the game ball count display 84 displays the number of game balls displayed minus the number transferred to the card unit 9.

The game ball count display 84 displays the number of game balls obtained by adding a predetermined value to the currently displayed number of game balls when a prize ball is obtained through play or when loan notification data indicating the number of loaned balls is received from the card unit 9. Note that a prize ball is obtained through play when a game ball enters the general prize opening 12, the first start opening 14, the second start opening 15, the first large prize opening 16, or the second large prize opening 17.

A ring-shaped game notification lamp 86 is provided around the game ball count display 84. The game notification lamp 86 emits a predetermined light in accordance with the display data transmitted from the frame control board 160.

A count button 82 is provided to the left of the effect button 35. By operating the count button 82, it is possible to transfer the ball count data stored in the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9.

A card unit 9 connected to the gaming machine 1 is provided on the left side of the gaming machine 1. A bill insertion slot 91 equipped with a bill validator 91a is provided on the upper side of the card unit 9. An amount display 93 is provided below the bill insertion slot 91. The amount display 93 is composed of a two-digit 7-segment LED.

Below the amount display 93 is a loan button 98 equipped with a loan button detection switch 98a. Below the loan button 98 is a ball count display 94. The ball count display 94 is made up of a 6-digit 7-segment LED.

Below the ball count display 94 is a card insertion port 92 equipped with a card reader/writer 92a. Below the card insertion port 92 is an ejection button 99 equipped with an ejection button detection switch 99a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear surface of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a main control board 110, a performance control board 120, a frame control board 160, a power supply board 175, a power supply plug 176, and a power supply switch 177.

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the main control board 110 is covered by a cover 110c. As shown in Figure 4, the main control board 110 is provided with a RAM clear SW 111a, and the RAM clear SW 111a protruding from the hole 110e can be pressed down even when the cover 110c is attached to the main control board 110.

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the frame control board 160 is covered by a cover 160c. As shown in Figure 4, the frame control board 160 is provided with a frame control display 85 and a game ball count clear SW 180e. The frame control display 85 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED, and displays information such as the number of game balls and error messages based on the display data sent from the frame control board 160. Even when the cover 160c is attached to the frame control board 160, the game ball count clear SW 180e protruding from the hole 160e can be pressed.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, each control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1. FIG.

The gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game, a presentation control board 120 that controls presentation related to the game, a frame control board 160 that controls the counting of game balls and the launching of game balls, and a power supply board 175. The power supply board 175 supplies power to the main control board 110, the presentation control board 120, and the frame control board 160.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main control unit 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main RAM 110b that serves as a work area for performing calculation processing, and a main ROM 110c in which game control programs and the like are stored, input/output ports, and a RAM clear SW 111a.

The input/output ports of the main control board 110 are connected to the performance control board 120, the frame control board 160, the general prize opening detection SW 12a, the gate detection SW 13a, the first start opening detection SW 14a, the second start opening detection SW 15a, the first large prize opening detection SW 16a, the second large prize opening detection SW 17a, the specific area detection SW 18a, the start opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, the specific area opening/closing solenoid 18d, the first special pattern display device 20, the second special pattern display device 21, the first special pattern reserved indicator 22, the second special pattern reserved indicator 23, the normal pattern display device 24, and the normal pattern reserved indicator 25.

Note that communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160 allows commands to be sent and received in both directions, while communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 120 allows commands to be sent in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120.

The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110c, and performs calculation processing related to the game using the main RAM 110b as a work area. The main CPU 110a performs control processing in response to detection signals from each input device (detection switch, etc.), control processing for each output device (display device, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving control commands.

The main RAM 110b of the main control board 110 has various data storage areas required for game control and storage areas for storing various counters, as will be described in detail later. In the event of a power outage, the data in the usage area of the main RAM 110b is backed up by a backup power source with a checksum added. The data backed up by the backup power source is restored after a data check using the checksum. The main ROM 110c of the main control board 110 has programs and data for game control stored in it, as will be described in detail later.

The performance control board 120 controls the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, and 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d, and 340e based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110.

The performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control unit 120m that controls the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display/audio control unit 140 that controls the image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 120m, a lamp/drive control unit 150 that controls the light-emitting performance and the movable role performance based on the performance control commands from the performance control unit 120m, and an input/output port for performance control.

The performance control unit 120m is equipped with a sub-CPU 120a that performs calculation processing, a sub-RAM 120b that serves as a work area when performing calculation processing, a sub-ROM 120c in which a performance control program and the like are stored, and an RTC 120d. When power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the RTC 120d operates from the supplied power source, and when power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1, it operates from the power of the installed backup power source. A performance button detection SW 35a and cross key detection SWs 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 39e are connected to the input port of the performance control base 120m.

The sub-CPU 120a of the performance control unit 120m receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator based on commands sent from the main control means 110 and input signals from the performance button detection SW 35a, etc., reads out the performance control program and data stored in the sub-ROM 120c, performs calculation processing related to game performance using the sub-RAM 120b as a work area, and transmits the performance control commands generated in this processing to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150.

The sub-RAM 120b of the performance control unit 120m is provided with various data storage areas required for performance control and storage areas for storing various counters, as will be described in detail later. The sub-ROM 120c of the performance control unit 120m stores programs and data for performance control, as will be described in detail later.

The display/audio control unit 140 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32 based on the performance control command received from the performance control unit 120m and the frame control board 160. The display/audio control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that controls the image display and audio output based on the performance control command from the performance control unit 120m and the frame control board 160, a VDP 145 that controls the image display device 31 based on the display control command (display list, etc.) received from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data, etc. are stored, an audio processor 144 that controls the audio output device 32 based on the audio control command received from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 148 in which audio data, etc. are stored. The image display device 31 and the audio output device 32 are connected to the input/output port of the audio/display control unit 140.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall RAM 141b that is used as a work area when performing calculation processing, an overall ROM 141c that stores the overall control program, etc., and an input/output port to which the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32 are connected.

The overall CPU 141a of the overall control unit 141 receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator based on the command sent from the performance control unit 120m, reads the overall control program and data stored in the overall ROM 141c, and performs calculation processing related to image display and audio output using the overall RAM 141b as a work area. The overall CPU 141a outputs to the audio processor 144 an audio control command generated by the calculation processing that instructs the audio to be output by the audio output device 32, and outputs to the VDP 145 a display control command (display list, etc.) that instructs the performance image to be displayed on the image display device 31.

The audio processor 144 is connected to the audio ROM 148. The audio ROM 148 stores compressed audio data. The audio processor 144 reads and decodes audio data from the audio ROM 148 based on audio control commands received from the general control unit 141, and outputs audio from the audio output device 32 using the decoded data.

The VDP 145 is connected to the CGROM 146. The CGROM 146 stores compressed image data, uncompressed palette data, and the like. The image data is composed of pixel information for sprite images and movie images to be displayed on the image display device 31. The pixel information of the image data is composed of color number information and transparency (α value) for each pixel, and the like. The palette data is data in which color number information and display colors are associated.

The VDP 145 is provided with a VRAM 147. The VRAM 147 is provided with a display list storage area, a compressed data decompression area, a first frame buffer area, and a second frame buffer area. The display list storage area is an area for storing the display list output from the integrated control unit 141. The compressed data decompression area is an area for storing image data obtained by decompressing the compressed image data read from the CGROM 146.

The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are storage areas that store display image data to be displayed on the image display device 31. After the image to be displayed has been drawn in one buffer area, while the image data is being transferred to the image display device 31, the next image to be displayed is drawn in the other buffer area. By repeating this process alternately, high-speed and smooth display control is achieved.

The VDP 145 stores the display list output from the general control unit 141, reads image data corresponding to the display list from the CGROM 146, and performs drawing processing in a drawing frame buffer using this image data. It also generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 31.

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp RAM 150b that is used as a work area when performing calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150c that stores lamp control programs and data, and an input/output port. The input/output ports of the lamp/drive control unit 150 are connected to the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, and 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d, and 340e.

The lamp CPU 150a of the lamp/drive control unit 150 receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator based on commands sent from the performance control unit 120m and the frame control board 160, reads out programs and data related to light emission control and prop drive stored in the lamp ROM 150c, and performs calculations related to light emission control and prop drive processing using the lamp RAM 150b as a work area. Through this calculation, the lamp CPU 150a controls the drive of the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, and 330c, and controls the light emission of the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d, and 340e.

The frame control board 160 controls the counting of game balls and the launching of game balls. The frame control board 160 is connected to the main control board 110 so that it can communicate in both directions. The frame control board 160 has a launch control unit 170, a game ball count control unit 180, an input port, an output port, and a game ball count clear SW 180e.

The input port of the frame control board 160 is connected to the shot ball sensor 2a, the foul ball sensor 2b, the touch sensor 3a, the shot volume 3b, the small ball sensor 81a, the iron ball sensor 81b, the door open detection switch 81c, the count button detection switch 82a, the card unit input terminal board 83a, and the radio wave detection switch 19a.

The output port of the frame control board 160 is connected to the firing solenoid 4a, the ball feed solenoid 4b, the card unit output terminal board 83b, the game ball count indicator 84, the frame control indicator 85, and the game notification lamp 86.

The launch control unit 170 includes a launch CPU 170a, a launch RAM 170b, and a launch ROM 170c. The launch CPU 170a reads out the programs and data stored in the launch ROM 170c, and performs calculations using the launch RAM 170b as a work area. When the power is turned on, the launch CPU 170a performs initial setting processing, and then performs control of the launch of game balls, etc.

The game ball count control unit 180 includes a game ball count CPU 180a, a game ball count RAM 180b, and a game ball count ROM 180c. The game ball count CPU 180a reads out the programs and data stored in the game ball count ROM 180c, and performs calculations using the game ball count RAM 180b as a work area.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs initial setting processing when the power is turned on, and then performs processing related to subtraction and addition of the number of playable game balls according to the progress of the game, and control related to the operation of the count button detection SW 82a according to the progress of the game, etc.

The game ball count RAM 180c has various memory areas such as an error 1 occurrence information memory area, an error 2 occurrence information memory area, an error 3 occurrence information memory area, an error 4 occurrence information memory area, a count button operation valid flag memory area, a count button operation invalid flag memory area, a game status flag memory area, a game machine information notification waiting flag memory area, an away flag memory area, a game interruption determination flag memory area, a count notification waiting flag memory area, a communication failure determination counter, a game machine information notification waiting timer counter, a count notification waiting timer counter, a game interruption determination timer counter, a game ball count counter, a shot ball count counter, a total prize ball count counter, and a count ball count counter.

When power is interrupted, the data in the used area of the game ball count RAM 180c is backed up by a backup power source (not shown) with a checksum added, and when power is restored, this backup information is restored after a data check using the checksum.

The power supply board 175 generates the main power required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine via a power plug 176, and supplies the generated main power to the main control board 110, the performance control board 120, the frame control board 160, etc. of the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 175 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit (not shown) that detects whether the voltage of the power supply supplied from outside has dropped and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160 based on the voltage drop, and a backup power supply circuit (not shown) for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160 in the event of a power interruption.

(Overall block diagram of the card unit)
6, the card unit 9 is provided with a card unit control board 90, a card unit SC board 95, and a power supply board 97. When the card unit 9 is powered on, power is supplied from the power supply board 97 to the card unit control board 90 and the card unit SC board 95, causing these boards to start operating.

The card unit control board 90 controls the basic operations of the card unit 9. Specifically, the card unit control board 90 performs processing such as analyzing data received from the gaming machine 1, processing according to inserted bills and cards, processing related to the buttons and displays provided on the card unit 9, and generating data to be sent to the gaming machine 1, hall computer, etc.

The card unit SC board 95 controls communication between the card unit 9 and the outside. Specifically, it controls communication between the card unit 9 and the gaming machine 1, the management center server (not shown), and the hall computer (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 6, the card unit control board 90 includes a one-chip microcomputer 910m having a unit CPU 910a, a unit RAM 910b, and a unit ROM 910c, as well as input and output ports.

The input port of the card unit control board 90 is connected to a card reader/writer 92a, a loan button detection SW 98a, an eject button detection SW 99a, and a bill validator 91a. The loan button detection SW 98a outputs a signal indicating that the loan button has been pressed. The eject button detection SW 99a outputs a signal indicating that the eject button has been pressed.

The output port of the card unit control board 90 is connected to a card reader/writer 92a, a value display 93, and a ball count display 94.

The card unit control board 90 is equipped with a unit CPU 910a, a unit RAM 910b, and a unit ROM 910c. The unit CPU 910a reads out the programs and data stored in the unit ROM 910c, and performs calculations using the unit RAM 910b as a work area.

The unit RAM 910b of the card unit control board 90 has various storage areas, such as an amount information storage area, a ball count information storage area, a loan receipt result response waiting flag storage area, a game status flag storage area, an eject button operation invalid flag storage area, a loan button operation invalid flag storage area, and a loan receipt result response waiting timer counter. The unit ROM 910c of the card unit control board 90 stores programs and various data for controlling the card unit 9.

(Flow of lending operation, counting operation, card insertion operation, and card ejection operation)
7, the flow of the game ball lending operation performed in the card unit 9 will be described. When a bill 200 is inserted into the bill insertion slot 91 of the card unit 9 (FIG. 7(a)), a number indicating the amount of the inserted bill (in the example of FIG. 7, "5" indicating 5,000 yen) is displayed on the amount display 93 (FIG. 7(b)).

When the loan button 98 is pressed once in this state (Fig. 7(c)), the amount display 93 displays "4", indicating that the amount data (5000 yen) stored in the card unit 9 has been reduced by 1000 yen to 4000 yen, and the game ball count display 84 of the gaming machine 1 displays "250" (Fig. 7(d)). Note that the reason the amount of 1000 yen is reduced and 250 game balls are loaned out is because balls are loaned out at 4 yen each.

When the card unit 9 and gaming machine 1 are in the state shown in FIG. 7(d), the player can press the loan button 98 once again to loan out another 1,000 yen worth of gaming balls. Specifically, when the loan button 98 is pressed once again in the state shown in FIG. 7(d), the amount display 93 of the card unit 9 displays "3," and the number of gaming balls display 84 of the gaming machine 1 displays "500."

However, if the card 201 storing the ball count data is inserted into the card unit 9 and the loan button 98 is pressed, the game balls will not be loaned out by subtracting the amount data, and the loaning by subtracting the ball count data will be given priority.

Next, the flow of the counting operation performed by the gaming machine 1 will be explained using Figure 8. When the count button 82 is pressed once while the number of gaming balls is displayed on the gaming ball count display 84 of the gaming machine 1, the number of gaming balls displayed on the gaming ball count display 84 is decreased by one, and the display on the ball count display 94 of the card unit 9 is increased by one.

For example, when "12345" is displayed on the game ball count display 84 of the gaming machine 1, if the count button 82 is pressed once (Figure 8 (a-1)), "12344" will be displayed on the game ball count display 84, and the display on the ball count display 94 of the card unit 9 will be updated from "0" to "1" (Figure 8 (a-2)).

In addition, when the number of game balls is displayed on the game ball count display 84 of the gaming machine 1, if the count button 82 is pressed once, the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 84 will be reduced by 250 and displayed, and the number of balls held display 94 of the card unit 9 will be increased by 250.

For example, when the game ball count display 84 of the gaming machine 1 shows "12345," if the count button 82 is pressed once and held (Figure 8 (b-1)), the game ball count display 84 will show "12095," and the ball count display 94 of the card unit 9 will update from "0" to "250" (Figure 8 (b-2)).

Next, the flow of the ejection and insertion operations of the card 201 will be explained using Figure 9. When the ejection button 99 of the card unit 9 is pressed, the amount data displayed on the amount display 93 and the number of balls displayed on the number of balls display 94 at that time are written to the card 201, and the card 201 with the amount data and the number of balls data written is ejected from the card insertion slot 92.

For example, when the amount display 93 of the card unit 9 shows "4" and the ball count display 94 shows "1234," pressing the eject button 99 (Fig. 9(a-1)) causes a card 201 with the amount data of 4000 yen and the ball count data of 1234 stored therein to be ejected from the card insertion slot 92 (Fig. 9(a-2)).

When the eject button on the card unit 9 is pressed while the number of balls held is displayed on the game ball count display 84 of the gaming machine 1, the amount data and the number of balls held data are not written to the card 201 and the card 201 is not ejected. Therefore, if the player wants to eject the card 201 in the above state, the player can perform a counting operation by pressing the counting button 82 of the gaming machine 1 to transfer all of the ball count data stored in the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9, and then eject the card 201 by pressing the eject button 99 of the card unit 9.

When a player inserts a card 201, which stores amount data and ball count data, into the card insertion slot, the card 201 is stored in the card unit 9, and the amount data stored in the card 201 is displayed on the amount display 93, and the ball count data stored in the card 201 is displayed on the ball count display 94.

For example, when a card 201 storing the amount data of 4000 yen and the number of balls held of 1234 is inserted into the card insertion slot 92 (Figure 9 (b-1)), the card 201 is stored in the card unit 9, and the amount display 93 shows "4" and the number of balls held display 94 shows "1234."

However, the card unit 9 will not accept the insertion of the card 201 into the card insertion port when the amount is displayed on the amount display 93 or the number of balls displayed on the ball count display 94.

(Game Status of Gaming Machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 has a normal state and a low base time-saving state in which the game is played by hitting from the left, and a high base time-saving state in which the game is played by hitting from the right. In these gaming states, the ease of winning the game ball into the second starting hole 15 is different.

The gaming machine 1 executes a normal pattern lottery when the starting condition for the normal pattern is met based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal pattern gate 13. If the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win, the normal pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops in a winning manner, and the movable piece 15b is controlled to open in a predetermined manner. If the result of the normal pattern lottery is a loss, the normal pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops in a losing manner.

As shown in Figure 10, the normal pattern change time is 90 seconds in the normal state, 89 seconds in the low base time-saving state, and 4 seconds in the high base time-saving state. In addition, the opening control time of the movable piece 15b when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a win is 0.1 seconds in the normal state, 0.11 seconds in the low base time-saving state, and 8 seconds in the high base time-saving state.

The shorter the normal symbol fluctuation time, the more opportunities there are for the normal symbol to be drawn, and the longer the opening time of the movable piece 15b when the normal symbol lottery result is a winning symbol, the greater the ease of a game ball winning through the second starting hole 15. Therefore, in the high base time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is significantly shorter and the opening time of the second starting hole 15 is also significantly longer than in the normal state and low base time-saving state, making it easier for a game ball to win through the second starting hole 15 than in the normal state and low base time-saving state.

On the other hand, in the low base time-saving state, the time it takes for the normal symbols to change is slightly shorter and the time the second start hole 15 is open is slightly longer than in the normal state, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 15 than in the normal state.

Therefore, the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 15 increases in the order of high base time-saving state, low base time-saving state, and normal state. Therefore, if the game state is more advantageous to the player the higher the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 15, the game states that are most advantageous to the player are in the order of high base time-saving state, low base time-saving state, and normal state.

As shown in FIG. 10, the gaming states of the gaming machine 1 include the three gaming states (normal state, low base time-saving state, high base time-saving state) that differ in the ease with which the gaming ball can enter the second starting hole 15 described above, as well as non-playable state 1 and non-playable state 2.

Unplayable state 1 is a gaming state in which no game can be played due to a complete function activation error occurring in the main control board 110. A complete function activation error is an error that occurs when the maximum number of game balls that can be acquired in the gaming machine 1 exceeds the daily upper limit of 95,000 balls, in order to restrict further game play.

Unplayable state 2 is a gaming state in which play cannot be performed due to the occurrence of a specific error in the frame control board 160. Specific errors in the frame control board 160 include a small ball detection error, an iron ball detection error, and a radio wave detection error.

In this embodiment, iron ball errors are detected because non-magnetic game balls are used, but if magnetic game balls are used, magnet errors may be detected instead of iron ball errors.

(Game Flow)
Next, the game flow of the gaming machine 1 will be described using the game flow of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In the gaming machine 1, a jackpot lottery is executed when the start conditions for the first special symbol based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 14 are met, and when the start conditions for the second special symbol based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole 15 are met. If the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the special symbol displays a fluctuating pattern for a predetermined period of time, then stops in a jackpot stop mode, and the first large prize hole 16 is controlled to open in a predetermined mode. If the special symbol lottery result is a small prize, the special symbol displays a fluctuating pattern for a predetermined period of time, then stops in a small prize stop mode, and the second large prize hole 17 is controlled to open in a predetermined mode. If the special symbol lottery result is a miss, the special symbol displays a fluctuating pattern for a predetermined period of time, then stops in a miss stop mode. There are two types of misses: normal misses and special misses.

Special misses are misses that are only selected by the jackpot lottery that is held when the conditions for starting the first special game are met, and consist of four types: special miss a, special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d. When a special miss is met in the normal state, the game state transitions to the low base time-saving state or the high base time-saving state.

The gaming machine 1 has six types of first-class jackpots and three types of second-class jackpots. The first-class jackpot is a special game in which the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to open in a predetermined manner after the special symbol stops on a jackpot symbol. The second-class jackpot is a special game that is played on the condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 19B when the special symbol stops on a small prize symbol and the second large prize opening 17 is controlled to open in a predetermined manner.

For the first type jackpot, there are four types of special games that are executed when the first special symbol stops on a jackpot symbol (A for 10R of the first type, B for 2R of the first type, C for 2R of the first type, D for 10R of the first type) and two types of special games that are executed when the second special symbol stops on a jackpot symbol (F for 10R of the first type, G for 2R of the first type).

In the first type 10R A, first type 10R D, and first type 10R F, 10 rounds of play are played in which the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be in an open state where game balls can enter. In each round of play, the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be open until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 9 balls) enter the first large prize opening 16 or the opening time of the first large prize opening 16 reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds).

For the first type 2R win B, the first type 2R win C, and the first type 2R win G, two rounds of play are played in which the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be in an open state in which game balls can win. In each round of play, the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be open until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) win the first large prize opening 16 or the opening time of the first large prize opening 16 reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds).

For the second type jackpot, there are three types of special games that are executed when the second special symbol stops on the small jackpot symbol and the game ball passes through specific area 19B during the small jackpot (H for second type 9R, I for second type 2R, and J for second type 9R).

For the second type 9R win H and the second type 9R win J, nine rounds of play are played in which the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be in an open state where game balls can win. In each round of play, the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be open until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) win the first large prize opening 16 or the opening time of the first large prize opening 16 reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds).

In the second type 2R I, two rounds of play are played in which the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be in an open state where game balls can enter. In each round of play, the first large prize opening 16 is controlled to be open until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the first large prize opening 16 or the opening time of the first large prize opening 16 reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds).

The game flow of the gaming machine 1 will be explained below with reference to FIG. 11. When A for 10R of the first kind or B for 2R of the first kind is achieved in the normal state, the game state after the special game ends will return to the normal state. When C for 2R of the first kind or D for 10R of the first kind is achieved in the normal state, the game state after the special game ends will become the high base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times.

When special miss a occurs in the normal state, the game state changes to the high base time-saving state, where the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times. When special miss b, special miss c, or special miss d occurs in the normal state, the game state changes to the low base time-saving state. The upper limit of the low base time-saving number of times (B) of the low base time-saving state, which is entered by the occurrence of the above three types of special miss, is 600 times (special miss b), 400 times (special miss c), and 200 times (special miss d), respectively. In the case of a normal miss, which is a miss other than the above four types of special miss, the game state does not change (except when the variable number of times (L), described below, reaches 800 times).

When C for 2R of the first type is established in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the special game ends will be the low base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 100 times. When A for 10R of the first type or B for 2R of the first type is established in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the special game ends will be the normal state. When D for 10R of the first type is established in the low base time-saving state, the game state after the special game ends will be the high base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times.

When a special miss or normal miss occurs in the low base time-saving state and the number of low base time-saving times (B) reaches a predetermined number (100 times, 200 times, 400 times, 600 times), the game state returns to the normal state.

In either the normal state or the low base time-saving state, if a special miss or a normal miss occurs and the number of fluctuations (L) reaches 800, the game state will change to the high base time-saving state, where the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100.

In the high base time-saving state, if an F per 10R of the first type, a G per 2R of the first type, an H per 9R of the second type, or an I per 2R of the second type is achieved, the game state after the special game ends will again be in the high base time-saving state where the upper limit of the number of high base time-saving times (J) is 100 times. In the high base time-saving state, if a J per 9R of the second type is achieved, the game state after the special game ends will be in the normal state. In the high base time-saving state, if a special miss or normal miss is achieved and the number of high base time-saving times (J) becomes 100 times, the game state will return to the normal state.

As the game flow above shows, the low base time-saving state is a game state in which it is more difficult to transition to the high base time-saving state than the normal state. Specifically, the conditions for transitioning from the low base time-saving state to the high base time-saving state are that the number of fluctuations (L) reaches 800 and that D is won per first type 10R. However, in addition to the above two conditions, there are also other conditions for transitioning from the normal state to the high base time-saving state, such as the occurrence of a special miss a and the occurrence of C per first type 2R.

Thus, in terms of the ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 15, the low base time-saving state is higher than the normal state, but in terms of the ease of transitioning to the most advantageous high base time-saving state, the normal state is higher than the low base time-saving state. Therefore, when in the low base time-saving state, the player will play with the aim of transitioning to the normal state. Specifically, when in the low base time-saving state, the player will play with the aim of achieving A per 10R of the first type or B per 2R of the first type, or playing to consume the specified number of low base time-saving times (B).

In addition to the route from the normal state to the high base time-saving state, a route is also provided for directly transitioning from the low base time-saving state to the high base time-saving state. Specifically, when the first type D per 10R is established in the low base time-saving state, or when the number of fluctuations (L) reaches 800, the low base time-saving state transitions from the low base time-saving state to the high base time-saving state. Therefore, even if the player is in the low base time-saving state, if the first type D per 10R is established, the state will transition to the high base time-saving state, and the player can always play with the expectation of transitioning to the high base time-saving state.

Furthermore, even if the player is in the low base time-saving state, when there are only a few fluctuations (L) remaining until 800 spins, the player can play with a very high sense of anticipation because the fluctuations (L) will reach 800 by consuming the remaining few fluctuation displays, and the player will definitely move to the high base time-saving state.

In addition, when the high base time-saving state is entered, if F per 10R of the first type, G per 2R of the first type, H per 9R of the second type, and I per 2R of the second type are consecutively entered before J per 9R of the second type is entered, the high base time-saving state will continue after the special game ends, making it possible to acquire a large number of game balls. In addition, after J per 9R of the second type is entered and the high base time-saving state is left, the game state will enter the normal state, which makes it easier to enter the high base time-saving state, so it is expected that the high base time-saving state will be returned to in a short period of time.

(Mode background image)
Next, a description will be given of the background images of the presentation modes corresponding to the game states of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 12 is a diagram showing the mode background images of the gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 12, the gaming machine 1 has three presentation modes: land mode, sea mode, and underwater temple mode. The land mode is a presentation mode that corresponds to a low base time-saving state. The sea mode is a presentation mode that corresponds to a normal state. The underwater temple mode is a presentation mode that corresponds to a high base time-saving state. However, as will be described in detail later, in principle, the presentation modes and game states have the above-mentioned correspondence relationship, but there are exceptional cases where the above-mentioned correspondence relationship does not exist.

In land mode, land background images (rural background, urban background, desert background) are displayed. In sea mode, underwater background images (shallow water background, deep sea background) are displayed. In underwater temple mode, underwater temple background images are displayed.

From the perspective of game flow, the game state becomes more advantageous in the order of high base time-saving state, normal state, and low base time-saving state as described above, so the background image of the presentation mode is set to become more advantageous the closer it is to the seabed.

In the ground mode, three types of background images are provided: a rural background image, an urban background image, and a desert background image. However, the background image displayed may be changed according to the progress of the number of low base time-saving times (B). For example, the fewer the number of low base time-saving times remaining until the specified consumption, the more likely the desert background image, urban background image, and rural background image are displayed in that order.

In addition, as described below, when transitioning to sea mode under certain conditions regardless of whether the game state is the low base time-saving state or the normal state, the player may be suggested which game state they are in based on the length of time the shallow water background image and the deep sea background image are displayed and the transition state. In that case, for example, the more frequently the deep sea background image is displayed, the more likely it is that the game state is normal.

(Command transmission between the frame control board, main control board and card unit)
The main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1 generates a gaming machine information notification command and transmits the generated gaming machine information notification command to the frame control board 160. The gaming machine information notification command is a command including information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the progress and stop status of the game.

Specifically, the gaming machine information notification command is a command that includes information indicating whether or not a complete function activation error has occurred, information indicating that the gaming ball has entered the start hole, information indicating that the gaming ball has entered the big prize hole, etc.

When the frame control board 160 receives a gaming machine information notification command from the main control board 110, it transmits a response command to the main control board 110. The main control board 110 checks whether or not a response command has been received, and determines whether or not a communication failure has occurred based on the reception status of the response command.

Figure 13 is a diagram showing an example of transmission and reception of gaming machine information notification commands and response commands between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160. As shown in Figure 13, the main control board 110 transmits a gaming machine information notification command to the frame control board 160 every 108 ms. If a situation occurs 10 consecutive times in which the frame control board 160 does not transmit a response command within 10 ms after transmitting a gaming machine information notification command, the main control board 110 determines that a communication failure has occurred and causes the image display device 31 to display a communication failure notification. Details of the gaming machine information notification process of the main control board 110 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the frame control board 160 of the gaming machine 1 transmits gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9 every 300 ms. Details of the gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 160 will be described later.

The gaming machine information notification data includes information indicating the gaming status of gaming machine 1, information indicating whether gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot, information indicating whether a complete function activation error has occurred, information indicating whether a small ball detection error has occurred, information indicating whether an iron ball detection error has occurred, information indicating whether a radio wave detection error has occurred, information indicating the number of game balls, information indicating the number of fired balls, information indicating the total number of winning balls, information indicating that a winning ball has been won in the start hole, and information indicating that a winning ball has been won in the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 15, the frame control board 160 transmits counting notification data to the card unit 9 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9. The counting notification data is data indicating the number of gaming balls transferred from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9. Details of the counting notification process of the card unit control board 90 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the card unit 9 accepts a loan operation by operating the loan button 98, it transmits loan notification data to the frame control board 160. The loan notification data is data that indicates the number of game balls that can be played on the gaming machine 1 and is transferred from the card unit 9 to the gaming machine 1.

When the frame control board 160 receives the loan notification data from the card unit 9, it transmits loan acceptance result response data to the card unit 9. If the card unit 9 does not receive the loan acceptance result response data from the frame control board 160 within 10 ms of transmitting the loan notification data, it resends the loan notification data. Details of the card unit 9's loan processing and response confirmation processing will be described later.

(About turning on the power of gaming machines)
When the power is turned on by operating the power switch 177 located on the back of the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 175 to the main control board 110, the performance control board 120, and the frame control board 160, and each board starts up.

There are four types of power-on operations for the gaming machine 1: normal power-on operation, main control board RAM clear power-on operation, frame control board RAM clear power-on operation, and all RAM clear power-on operation. The four types of power-on operations are explained below with reference to Figure 17.

The normal power-on operation is performed by turning on the power switch 177 (Fig. 17(a-2)) without pressing the RAM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 180e (Fig. 17(a-1)).

The main control board RAM clear power-on operation is executed by pressing the RAM clear SW 111a and turning on the power SW 177 (FIG. 17(b-2)) with the game ball count clear SW 180e not pressed (FIG. 17(b-1)). When the power is turned on by the main control board RAM clear power-on operation, an initialization process is performed which involves clearing all areas of the main RAM 110b of the main control board 110. Details of the initialization process of the main control board 110 will be described later.

The frame control board RAM clear power-on operation is executed by turning on the power switch 177 (Fig. 17(c-2)) with the RAM clear switch 111a not pressed and the game ball count clear switch 180e pressed (Fig. 17(c-1)). When the power is turned on by the frame control board RAM clear power-on operation, an initialization process is performed which involves clearing the entire area of the game ball count RAM 180b of the frame control board 160. Details of the initial setting process of the frame control board 160 will be described later.

The all RAM clear power-on operation is executed by pressing the RAM clear SW 111a and the game ball count clear SW 180e (Fig. 17(d-1)) and turning on the power switch 177 (Fig. 17(d-2)). When the power is turned on by the all RAM clear power-on operation, an initialization process is performed on each board, which involves clearing the entire area of the main RAM 110b on the main control board 110 and the entire area of the game ball count RAM 180b on the frame control board 160.

Next, we will explain the various tables stored in the main ROM 110c. Figure 18 shows the lottery determination table for determining whether a special symbol is a winner or loser, and the lottery determination table for determining whether a normal symbol is a winner or loser, for the gaming machine 1.

(Win/lose lottery judgment table)
Specifically, Figure 18(a) is a jackpot lottery determination table for the first special pattern display device, Figure 18(b) is a jackpot lottery determination table for the second special pattern display device, and Figure 18(c) is a jackpot lottery determination table for the normal pattern display device.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the lottery results based on the first special symbol are one of three types: big win, special miss, and normal miss. As shown in FIG. 18(b), the lottery results based on the second special symbol are one of three types: big win, small win, and normal miss. The main CPU 110a refers to the big win lottery determination tables shown in FIG. 18(a) and FIG. 18(b) and determines the lottery result based on the obtained big win random number value.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), the result of the lottery based on the normal symbol will be a win or a miss. The main CPU 110a refers to the win lottery determination table shown in FIG. 18(c) and determines the lottery result based on the obtained normal symbol random number value. As shown in FIG. 18(c), the probability of winning based on the normal symbol lottery is the same in the normal state, the low base time-saving state, and the high base time-saving state. However, the probability of winning based on the normal symbol lottery may be changed depending on the game state.

(Pattern Determination Table)
19A and 19B are diagrams showing the big win and small win symbol determination tables of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, Fig. 19A is a big win symbol determination table. In the big win symbol determination table, the type of special symbol display device, the special symbol random number value, the type of special symbol (type of big win), the stop symbol data, and the symbol designation command are associated with each other.

Figure 19 (b) is a small win symbol determination table. The small win symbol determination table is associated with special symbol random number values, special symbol types (types of big wins that are executed by winning in specific area 19B), stop symbol data, and symbol designation commands. In gaming machine 1, a small win is achieved only by drawing the second special symbol, but it is also possible to achieve a small win based on the results of the drawing of the first special game.

The pattern designation command is composed of one byte of MODE data indicating the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. In addition, even if it is a control command (such as a variation pattern designation command) sent from another main control board 110 described later to the performance control unit 120m, the data structure of the command is the same as the pattern designation command.

Figure 20 shows the symbol determination table for the losing symbols of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, Figure 20(a) is a symbol determination table for special losing symbols. Figure 20(b) is a symbol determination table for normal losing symbols.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special miss is selected only by the winning/losing lottery based on the first special symbol, so the special miss symbol determination table shown in FIG. 20(a) contains only data associated with the first special symbol display device 20. The special miss symbol determination table associates special symbol random number values, special symbol types (special miss types), stopping symbol data, and symbol designation commands. The regular miss symbol determination table shown in FIG. 20(b) associates the type of special symbol display device, special symbol random number values, special symbol types (regular miss types), and stopping symbol data.

When the special symbol starts to change, the main CPU 110a determines a symbol designation command based on the symbol determination table shown in Figures 19 and 20 and the obtained special symbol random number value, and transmits the determined symbol designation command to the performance control unit 120m.

(Special Game End Setting Table)
FIG. 21 shows a special game end setting table for determining the game state after the special game of the gaming machine 1 ends.

The special game end setting table associates the type of special symbol display device, the type of special symbol, the stopped symbol data, the game status information set in the game status buffer, the game status at the end of the special game, the low base time-saving count (B), and the high base time-saving status (J).

The "game status buffer" is a memory area provided in the main RAM 110b, and is a memory area in which information indicating the game status at the time of the change in which a jackpot was won is stored. As described above, the game status of the gaming machine 1 is composed of a normal state, a low base time-saving state, and a high base time-saving state.

When a jackpot is won, the game state will be normal if the game state information in the game state buffer is "00H", low base time-saving state if the game state information in the game state buffer is "01H", and high base time-saving state if the game state information in the game state buffer is "02H".

The main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table shown in FIG. 21 and determines the game state after the special game ends, the number of low base time reductions (B), and the number of high base time reductions (J) based on the stop data of the special pattern and the game state information in the game state buffer.

Below, we will explain the changes in the game state when each jackpot symbol stops as a special symbol, which overlaps with the game flow explained using Figure 11.

When special symbol A stops (when A is selected for 10R of the first type) and when special symbol B stops (when B is selected for 2R of the first type), the game state after the special game ends will be the normal state regardless of the game state information in the game state buffer.

When the special symbol C stops (when C is selected for the first type 2R), the game state after the special game ends will be a high base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times if the game state information in the game state buffer is in the normal state, and a low base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 100 times if the game state information in the game state buffer is in the low base time-saving state or high base time-saving state.

When the special symbol D stops (when D is selected for the first type 10R), the game state after the special game ends will be a high base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times, regardless of the game state information in the game state buffer.

When special symbol F stops (when F is selected for 10R of the first type), when special symbol G stops (when G is selected for 2R of the first type), when special symbol H stops (when H is selected for 9R of the second type), and when special symbol I stops (when I is selected for 2R of the second type), the game state after the special game ends will be a high base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times, regardless of the game state information in the game state buffer.

When the special symbol J stops (when J is selected for the second type 9R win), the game state after the special game ends will be the normal state regardless of the game state information in the game state buffer.

In this embodiment, only the second type 9R win J is provided as a jackpot based on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol that transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal state after completion, but multiple types of jackpots based on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol that transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal state after completion may be provided. Also, instead of two types, one type may be provided as a jackpot based on the result of the lottery for the second special symbol that transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal state after completion.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is hit and the game transitions from the normal state to the high base time-saving state, the upper limit of the number of high base time-saving times (J) is set to the same 100 times for all jackpots, but the upper limit of the number of high base time-saving times (J) may be set to different times depending on the type of jackpot that is hit.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of high base time-saving times (J) is set to the same 100 times when transitioning from the normal state to the high base time-saving state is triggered by a jackpot, and when transitioning to the high base time-saving state is triggered by a special miss or normal miss and the number of fluctuations (L) reaching 800 times, but different upper limits may be set for each case.

(Setting table for special losing symbols and normal losing symbols)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a setting table for determining the game state after the special losing symbol of the gaming machine 1 has stopped.

The special miss pattern stop setting table corresponds to the type of special pattern display device, the type of special pattern, the stopped pattern data, the game state before the pattern stops, the game state when the pattern stops, the number of low base time reductions (B), and the number of high base time reductions (J).

Below, we will explain the changes in the game state when each losing symbol stops as a special symbol, which overlaps with the game flow explained using Figure 11.

When special symbol a stops (when special miss a is selected), if the game state before the symbol stops is normal, it will be in a high base time-saving state where the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times, if the game state before the symbol stops is in a low base time-saving state, the game state and the low base time-saving number of times (B) will be maintained, and if the game state before the symbol stops is in a high base time-saving state, the game state and the high base time-saving number of times (J) will be maintained.

When special symbol b stops (when special miss b is selected), if the game state before the symbol stops is normal, the game state will be a low base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 600 times, if the game state before the symbol stops is a low base time-saving state, the game state and the low base time-saving number of times (B) are maintained, and if the game state before the symbol stops is a high base time-saving state, the game state and the high base time-saving number of times (J) are maintained.

When special symbol c stops (when special miss c is selected), if the game state before the symbol stops is normal, the game state will be a low base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 400 times, if the game state before the symbol stops is a low base time-saving state, the game state and the low base time-saving number of times (B) are maintained, and if the game state before the symbol stops is a high base time-saving state, the game state and the high base time-saving number of times (J) are maintained.

When the special symbol d stops (when special miss d is selected), if the game state before the symbol stops is the normal state, the game state will be the low base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 200 times, if the game state before the symbol stops is the low base time-saving state, the game state and the low base time-saving number of times (B) are maintained, and if the game state before the symbol stops is the high base time-saving state, the game state and the high base time-saving number of times (J) are maintained.

Although not shown in the table shown in FIG. 22, when special symbol y stops (when a normal miss is selected by drawing the first special symbol) and when special symbol z stops (when a normal miss is selected by drawing the second special symbol), the game state does not change, unlike when a special miss is selected.

When a special miss or normal miss is selected, the game state when the pattern stops is as described above, but there are cases where the game state is controlled differently from the control described above. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations (L) reaches 800 times in the normal state or low base time-saving state, the game state becomes a high base time-saving state in which the upper limit of the high base time-saving number of times (J) is 100 times, regardless of the type of missing pattern. Also, when the high base time-saving number of times (J) reaches 100 times in the high base time-saving state, the game state becomes the normal state regardless of the type of missing pattern.

In this embodiment, in the normal state, only one special miss a is provided as a special miss that transitions to the high base time-saving state, but multiple types of special misses that transition to the high base time-saving state may be provided. In that case, the upper limit number of high base time-saving times (J) may be set to different numbers depending on the type of special miss that has been achieved.

(Special Game Control Table)
Fig. 23 is a diagram showing a special game control table that is referred to when controlling a special game of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 23(a) is a diagram showing a special game control table for a first type jackpot. In the special game control table for a first type jackpot, stop symbol data, opening time, opening designation command, table number of the big prize opening opening control table, ending time, and ending designation command are associated with each of six types of first type jackpots.

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in more detail later, refers to the special game control table for the first type of jackpot and controls the opening game, round game, and ending game of the first type of jackpot based on the stopping pattern data.

The special game is a game consisting of an opening game, a round game, and an ending game. The opening game is a game that is played from the start of the special game until the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17 is controlled to be opened for the first time. The round game is a game in which the first large prize opening 16 or the second large prize opening 17 is controlled to be closed after being controlled to be opened for a predetermined period of time. The ending game is a game that is played from the end of the last round game to the end of the special game. The opening time is the time from the start of the special game to the start of the first round game, and the ending time is the time from the end of the last round game to the end of the special game.

The opening designation command and the ending designation command are both commands sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120. As will be described in more detail below, when the performance control board 120 receives an opening designation command or an ending designation command, it controls the performance of the opening game performance or the ending game performance.

Figure 23 (b) shows the special game control table for the second type of big win. The special game control table for the second type of big win corresponds to the stop pattern data, opening time, opening designation command, table number of the big win opening opening control table, ending time, and ending designation command.

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in detail later, refers to the special game control table for the second type jackpot and controls the opening game, round game, and ending game of the second type jackpot based on the stopping pattern data.

Figure 23 (c) shows the special game control table for small wins. The special game control table for small wins is associated with the stop symbol data, opening time, opening designation command, table number of the large prize opening opening control table, ending time, and ending designation command.

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in more detail later, refers to the special game control table for small wins and controls the opening game, round game, and ending game of the small win based on the stopping pattern data.

(Big prize opening/closing control table)
Fig. 24 is a diagram showing a large prize opening opening/closing control table of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 24(a) is a diagram showing a large prize opening opening opening/closing control table for a first type of large prize winning. In the large prize opening opening/closing control table for a first type of large prize winning, the table number, the round number, the type of the large prize opening, the special electric operation number, and the opening time of the large prize opening and the closing time of the large prize opening in each round of play are associated with each other.

As mentioned above, there are two types of first-class jackpots: 10R jackpots and 2R jackpots, and the opening of the jackpot slot in each round of play is controlled by referring to table numbers "01" and "02."

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in more detail later, controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 16 based on the table number by referring to the large prize opening opening control table for the first large prize when playing a round of play for the first large prize.

Figure 24 (b) shows the large prize opening/closing control table for the second type of jackpot. The large prize opening/closing control table for the second type of jackpot corresponds to the table number, round number, type of large prize opening, special electric activation number, and the opening time of the large prize opening and closing time of the large prize opening in each round of play.

As mentioned above, there are two types of second-class jackpots: a 9R jackpot and a 2R jackpot, and the opening of the jackpot hole in each round of play is controlled by referring to table numbers "03" and "04."

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in more detail later, controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 16 based on the table number by referring to the large prize opening opening and closing control table for the second type of jackpot when playing a round of play in the second type of jackpot.

Figure 25 shows the large prize opening opening/closing control table for small prizes and the specific area opening/closing control table for small prizes of gaming machine 1. Figure 25(a) shows the large prize opening opening/closing control table for small prizes. The large prize opening opening opening/closing control table for small prizes corresponds to the table number, round number, type of large prize opening, special electric activation number, and the opening time of the large prize opening and the closing time of the large prize opening.

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in detail later, refers to the small win large prize opening opening/closing control table to control the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 17 when playing a small win game. Note that the opening and closing control of the large prize opening during a small win game is only one type of opening and closing control, which repeats the opening of the second large prize opening 17 for 0.1 seconds and closing it for 0.05 seconds 10 times.

In this embodiment, the second large winning opening 17 has one opening and closing control pattern in the small winning game, but multiple patterns may be provided. In this case, multiple opening and closing control patterns for the second large winning opening 17 that differ in the ease of ball entry into the specific area 19B during the small winning game may be provided to vary the ease of occurrence of the second type of jackpot based on ball entry into the specific area 19B according to the type of small winning game. In addition, among the multiple opening and closing control patterns for the second large winning opening 17, a pattern in which the game ball easily enters the specific area 19B during normal play and a pattern in which the game ball has difficulty entering the specific area 19B may be provided to vary the ease of occurrence of the second type of jackpot.

Figure 25 (b) is a diagram showing a specific area opening/closing control table for small wins. The specific area opening/closing control table for small wins associates the elapsed time after the second large prize opening 17 is opened, the opening time at which the specific area 19B is opened as the sliding member 19C moves backward, and the closing time at which the specific area 19B is closed as the sliding member 19C moves forward.

In this embodiment, the specific area 19B has one opening and closing control pattern in the small win game, but multiple patterns may be provided. In this case, multiple opening and closing control patterns for the specific area 19B that differ in the ease of a game ball entering the specific area 19B during a small win game may be provided to vary the ease of occurrence of a second type jackpot based on a game ball entering the specific area 19B. Furthermore, among the multiple opening and closing control patterns for the specific area 19B, a pattern in which a game ball easily enters the specific area 19B during normal play and a pattern in which a game ball has difficulty entering the specific area 19B may be provided to vary the ease of occurrence of a second type jackpot.

The main CPU 110a, which will be described in detail later, controls the opening and closing of the specific area 19B by referring to the specific area opening and closing control table for small wins when playing a small win game.

(Special pattern variation table)
26, 27, 28, and 29 are diagrams showing special symbol variation pattern determination tables which are referenced to determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the gaming machine 1.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first special symbol is composed of three types of tables: one for the normal state (Figure 26), one for the low base time-saving state (Figure 27), and one for the high base time-saving state (Figure 28).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for the second special symbol is composed of two types of tables: one for the period from the end of the jackpot in the high base time-saving state started by the jackpot until the end of the fluctuation for the 30th spin (Fig. 29(a)), and one for the entire period in the high base time-saving state started by the special miss, or the period from the end of the jackpot to the 31st spin onwards in the high base time-saving state started by the jackpot (Fig. 29(b)).

Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine 1 is composed of five types of tables. All of these variation pattern determination tables are stored in the main ROM 120c.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown for the first special symbol in the normal state (Fig. 26), the first special symbol in the low base time-saving state (Fig. 27), and the second special symbol (Fig. 29) correspond to the special symbol, the reserved number, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern designation command. Note that the fluctuation pattern determination table shown for the first special symbol in the high base time-saving state (Fig. 28) does not correspond to the reserved number and the random number value for reach determination, but corresponds to the special symbol, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern designation command.

The random number value for reach determination is a random number value that is made up of 100 values with a range from 0 to 99. The random number value for reach determination is not referenced in the case of special symbols corresponding to a jackpot, because a reach effect is always performed when a jackpot occurs.

In addition, the random number value for reach determination is not referenced in the case of special symbols that correspond to special misses, because reach effects are always performed when there is a special miss in normal and low base time-saving states, and shortening variations are always performed when there is a special miss in high base time-saving states. Therefore, the random number value for reach determination is only referenced in the case of special symbols that correspond to normal misses (special symbol y and special symbol z).

The following describes the first special symbol variation pattern determination table referenced in the normal state with reference to Figure 26. In the first special symbol variation pattern determination table referenced in the normal state, in the case of a variation display in which special symbol A (A per first type 10R) stops, one of variation patterns 10, 11, or 12 is associated with the value of the special symbol variation random number value.

The random number value for special symbol fluctuation is a random number value consisting of 100 values with a random number range from 0 to 99. The distribution of fluctuation patterns for special symbol A increases in the order of fluctuation pattern 12, fluctuation pattern 11, and fluctuation pattern 10. In addition, the fluctuation times T10, T11, and T12 for fluctuation patterns 10, 11, and 12 are 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 50 seconds, respectively.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referenced in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns and fluctuation times of the special symbols when special symbol B (B for 2R of the first type), special symbol C (C for 2R of the first type), and special symbol D (D for 10R of the first type) stop are associated with multiple types of fluctuation patterns according to the random number value for the special symbol fluctuation, just like in the case of special symbol A.

In the first special symbol variation pattern determination table referenced in the normal state, variation patterns 30 and 31 are associated with each other according to the value of the special symbol variation random number value as variation patterns when special symbol a (special miss a) stops. Similarly to special symbol a, two variation patterns are associated with each special symbol according to the value of the special symbol variation random number value as variation patterns when special symbol b (special miss b), special symbol c (special miss c), and special symbol d (special miss d) stop.

Fluctuation patterns 30, 32, 34, and 36, which correspond to special misses in the normal state, all have the same fluctuation time of T30 (30 seconds). Also, fluctuation patterns 33, 35, and 37, which correspond to special misses in the normal state, all have the same fluctuation time of T32 (40 seconds).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referenced in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the special symbol when the special symbol y (normal miss) stops are allocated according to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1), the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol fluctuation.

Specifically, when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is 0 or 1, if the random number value for reach determination is 0 to 69, variation pattern 40 is associated, and if the random number value for reach determination is 70 to 99, one of variation patterns 41, 42, 43, or 44 is associated depending on the value of the random number value for special symbol variation. Similarly, when the first special symbol reserved number is 2 or 3, if the random number value for reach determination is 0 to 89, variation pattern 45 is associated, and if the random number value for reach determination is 90 to 99, one of variation patterns 46, 47, 48, or 49 is associated depending on the value of the random number value for special symbol variation.

Note that a maximum of 4 may be stored as the reserved number of special symbols, but the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved number of special symbols. Therefore, when referencing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, there is no situation in which the reserved number is 4, so the case of a reserved number of 4 is not included in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table.

The fluctuation time T40 of fluctuation pattern 40 is 4 seconds, and the fluctuation time T44 of fluctuation pattern 45 is 2 seconds. Therefore, the average time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol when a normal miss stops is set longer when the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is 0 or 1 than when it is 2 or 3. This is set to have two purposes: by setting the fluctuation time to be longer the fewer the reserved number, it becomes easier to accumulate reserved numbers when there are fewer reserved numbers, and by making it possible to quickly consume missing fluctuations when the reserved number is large, the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, when special symbol y stops, variation patterns 42 and 47, in which the random number value for special symbol variation is selected from 50 to 69, both have a variation time of T30 (30 seconds), which is the same variation time as when variation pattern 30 (special symbol a), variation pattern 32 (special symbol b), variation pattern 34 (special symbol c), and variation pattern 36 (special symbol d), which correspond to special misses, stop. Details will be described later, but in the case of the above variation patterns, all of them have the same variation time because they perform the same roulette performance.

Next, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in the low base time-saving state will be explained with reference to Figure 27. As with the table referenced in the normal state, in the case of a big win or special miss, a fluctuation pattern is assigned according to the type of special symbol and the value of the random number for special symbol fluctuation, and in the case of a normal miss, a fluctuation pattern is assigned according to the number of reserved symbols, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol fluctuation. In either case, the assigned fluctuation pattern is associated with a fluctuation time and a fluctuation pattern designation command.

The first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in the normal state and the low base time-saving state has the same number of fluctuation patterns allocated to each special symbol except for special symbol d, and the allocation values of the reserved number, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol fluctuation are also the same.

In addition, in the normal state, two types of variation patterns can be determined for special pattern d by the random number value for special pattern variation, but in the low base time-saving state, one type of variation pattern is determined regardless of the random number for special pattern variation.

In addition, when comparing the fluctuation times in the fluctuation pattern determination tables for the normal state and the low base time-saving state, the fluctuation times are the same for all fluctuation patterns except for fluctuation pattern 31 (normal state) and fluctuation pattern 64 (low base time-saving state), in which the random number value for special pattern fluctuation is "20 to 99" when the special pattern is special miss a.

The fluctuation time T31 of fluctuation pattern 31, which results in special miss a in the normal state, is 50 seconds, and the fluctuation time T44 of fluctuation pattern 64, which results in special miss a in the low base time-saving state, is 35 seconds.

Next, the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol referenced in the high base time-saving state will be explained using Figure 28. As described above, the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol in the high base time-saving state is not associated with the reserved number and the random number value for reach determination, but is associated with the special symbol, the random number value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol, and the variation pattern designation command.

In the table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the high base time-saving state, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is assigned according to the type of special symbol and the random number value for the special symbol fluctuation. Also, in the case of a special miss and a normal miss in the high base time-saving state, each special symbol is associated with one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time T59 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation time T59 is a shortened fluctuation time of 2 seconds.

Next, the variation pattern determination table of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the variation of the second special symbol, which is referred to during the period from the end of the big win until the variation display is performed up to the 30th spin. In the variation pattern determination table of the second special symbol shown in FIG. 29(a), when the special symbol F (F for the first type 10R) and the special symbol G (G for the first type 2R) stop, multiple types of variation patterns are associated with each special symbol according to the value of the random number value for the variation of the special symbol, similar to the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29(a), when the special symbols H, I, and J corresponding to the small win stop, fluctuation patterns 210, 211, and 212 are associated, respectively. In addition, fluctuation patterns 210, 211, and 212 all have the same fluctuation time of T55 (50 seconds).

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29(a), the fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time of the special symbol when the special symbol z, which is normally a miss, stops are associated with the second special symbol reserved number (U2), the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol fluctuation, in the same way as when the special symbol y (normal miss) stops in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, when special symbol z stops, the variation patterns 222 and 226, in which the random number value for special symbol variation is selected from 40 to 89, all have a variation time of T55 (50 seconds), which is the same variation time as when variation pattern 210 (special symbol H), variation pattern 211 (special symbol I), and variation pattern 212 (special symbol J), which correspond to small wins, stop. Details will be described later, but in the case of the above variation patterns, all of them have the same variation time because they perform the same chance performance.

Figure 29 (b) is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation that is referenced during periods other than the period from the end of the jackpot until the variation display is performed up to the 30th spin. Specifically, it is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation that is referenced during the high base time-saving state from the next variation after the establishment of special miss a in the normal state, and during the high base time-saving state from the 31st spin onwards after the transition to the high base time-saving state after the end of the jackpot.

The variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 29(b) has fewer types of variation pattern designation commands than the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 29(a). Specifically, in FIG. 29(a), there are many cases in which multiple variation pattern designation commands are assigned to one type of special symbol depending on the value of the random number value for special symbol variation, but in FIG. 29(b), only one type of variation pattern designation command is associated with each special symbol except for special symbol z.

The fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation selected in FIG. 29(b) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation selected in FIG. 29(a). Specifically, the fluctuation times selected for the special symbol F in FIG. 29(a) are T52 (60 seconds), T51 (40 seconds), and T50 (20 seconds), while the fluctuation time selected for the special symbol F in FIG. 29(b) is T60 (5 seconds). In addition, the fluctuation times selected for the special symbols G, H, I, and J are, like the special symbol F, such that the fluctuation time T60 selected in FIG. 29(b) is shorter than each fluctuation time selected in FIG. 29(a).

Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation selected in FIG. 29(b) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation selected in FIG. 29(a). Specifically, the fluctuation times selected for special pattern z, which is a normal miss in FIG. 29(a), are T58 (60 seconds), T55 (50 seconds), T57 (20 seconds), T56 (6 seconds), and T59 (3 seconds). On the other hand, the fluctuation times selected for special pattern z, which is a normal miss in FIG. 29(b), are T61 (2 seconds) and T62 (1 second).

As a result, the second special symbol fluctuation time selected in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 29(b) is more likely to be shorter than the fluctuation time selected in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 29(a). In other words, the second special symbol fluctuation time is set to be shorter in the fluctuation display after the next fluctuation display after special miss a is established, and in the fluctuation display after the 31st spin after the end of the jackpot, than in the fluctuation display from the end of the jackpot to the 30th spin.

Therefore, the game progresses faster from the next variable display after special miss a occurs, and from the 31st spin onwards after the end of the jackpot, compared to the high base time-saving state from the end of the jackpot to the 30th spin. Details will be described later, but in the high base time-saving state, three different presentation modes are executed depending on the period "from the next variable display after special miss a occurs," "from the 31st spin onwards after the end of the jackpot," and "from the end of the jackpot to the 30th spin."

As will be described in more detail later, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 26, Figure 27, Figure 28, or Figure 29, and determines the special symbol variation pattern, special symbol variation time, and variation pattern designation command based on the type of special symbol display, the type of special symbol, the number of reserved special symbols, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation.

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, the presentation control board 120 controls the game presentation based on the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110. The presentation contents in Figures 26, 27, 28, and 29 show examples of presentations executed by the presentation control board 120 in response to each variation pattern designation command.

The following describes each of the effects shown in FIG. 26, FIG. 27, FIG. 28, or FIG.
"Reach" refers to a variation mode in which, after all decorative symbols 36 are displayed, the same type of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R, and the variation of the middle symbol 36C that is not temporarily stopped continues. If the last temporarily stopped middle symbol 36C is the same type as the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R that were temporarily stopped earlier, it is a combination of decorative symbols 36 that indicates a big win. If the last temporarily stopped middle symbol 36C is a different type from the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R that were temporarily stopped earlier, it is a combination of decorative symbols 36 that indicates a loss.

"Normal fluctuation" and "shortened fluctuation" refer to fluctuations in which multiple decorative patterns 36 do not reach a winning combination during the fluctuation, but stop at different types of decorative patterns 36 and miss. Also, the fluctuation time of a "normal fluctuation" is longer than that of a "shortened fluctuation."

However, when the combination of decorative patterns 36 resulting in a miss is a specific combination, it may be a combination of decorative patterns 36 that indicates a specific jackpot (for example, "0", "0", "7", etc.). Also, it may be a combination of decorative patterns 36 that indicates a specific jackpot by temporarily stopping a type of decorative pattern 36 that indicates a specific jackpot at the middle pattern 36C in a reach miss (for example, "1", "2R hit", "1", etc.).

A "normal reach" is a reach effect with a low probability of winning, in which the left and right patterns 36L and 36R of the same type temporarily stop while the middle pattern 36C changes. An "SP reach" is a reach with a higher probability of winning than a normal reach, and is an effect that uses characters or the like against a background different from that of a normal reach to tease the player as to which type of decorative pattern 36 will temporarily stop on the middle pattern 36C. A "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, in which three decorative patterns 36 of the same type are combined and change slowly.

The "roulette effect" is an effect that is executed after the symbol combination of the decorative symbols 36 indicating a missed reach (for example, "3", "2", "3") is temporarily stopped, and indicates a change in the presentation mode or a continuation of the presentation mode.

As shown in Figures 26 and 27, the roulette effect is an effect that is executed when the first special symbol is a special miss or part of a normal miss. The results that make up the roulette effect are three types of images corresponding to "land mode," "sea mode," and "underwater temple mode." Details will be described later, but the image corresponding to "land mode" is an image with the word "land" added, the image corresponding to "sea mode" is an image with the word "sea" added, and the image corresponding to "underwater temple mode" is an image with the word "temple" added.

The roulette presentation will notify you of a change in presentation mode or continuation of the presentation mode based on the final result of the roulette according to the game flow described above. Note that the roulette presentation is only executed when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the sea mode, and is not executed when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the roulette effect indicates a change in mode effect, the background image will switch to a background image that corresponds to the new mode. Also, when the roulette effect indicates that the mode effect will continue, the currently displayed background image will be maintained, or the display will switch to a different background image within the same mode (for example, in ocean mode, the background image will switch from a "shallow water background image" to a "deep sea background image").

A "battle effect" is an effect that notifies the player of a successful jackpot or the transition or continuation of a performance mode by displaying the outcome of a battle (win, loss, draw), and can only be executed when the performance mode is sea mode.

The battle victory effect is executed when a first type 2R C or a special miss a occurs in normal sea mode, and when a first type 10R D occurs in low base time-saving state and normal sea mode. In either case, the game state will transition to high base time-saving state.

The defeat animation of a battle is executed when special miss b, special miss c, or special miss d occurs in sea mode in normal state (when the game state transitions to low base time-saving state). Also, the defeat animation of a battle is executed when some special miss occurs in sea mode in low base time-saving state (when the game state maintains low base time-saving state).

The battle draw effect is executed when A for 10R of the first type, B for 2R of the first type, or a normal miss occurs (when the game state maintains the normal state) in sea mode in the normal state. The battle draw effect is also executed when some special miss occurs (when the game state maintains the low base time-saving state) in sea mode in the low base time-saving state. Details of the battle effect will be described later.

The "chance effect" is an effect that is executed after the symbol combination of the decorative symbols 36 that indicates a missed reach (for example, "5", "4", "5") is temporarily stopped, and is an effect that indicates a small win or a missed reach.

The chance effect is executed when the second special symbol is a small win or part of a normal miss. Note that the chance effect is executed only when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is not executed when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the chance effect, one of three types of images is displayed: "9R win," "2R win," or "Miss." Specifically, the chance effect is an effect in which one of the three types of images appears from within a treasure chest image that resembles a treasure chest, and the image that appears notifies the user of the winning result.

The image that appears from the treasure chest image is an image of "9R win" if the second special symbol is a second type 9R H or a second type 9R J, an image of "2R win" if the second special symbol is a second type 2R I, and an image of "lose" if the second special symbol is a regular miss.

The treasure chest images are made up of three different designs, and the likelihood of winning varies depending on the type of treasure chest image. A poor treasure chest is more likely to produce a losing image, a normal treasure chest has three types appearing evenly, and a luxurious treasure chest is more likely to produce a 9R or 2R winning image.

The "instant win effect" is an effect in which the left pattern 36L, right pattern 36R, and center pattern 36C stop in sequence at high speed to form a jackpot pattern, without any effect to hint at a jackpot through a reach effect. In the case of a first type jackpot (special pattern F, special pattern J), a combination of identical decorative patterns 36 is displayed. In the case of a second type jackpot (special pattern H, special pattern I, special pattern J), the same decorative pattern 36 is displayed on the left pattern 36L and right pattern 36R, and then a special pattern ("V hit") indicating a small jackpot win is displayed on the center pattern 36C.

As mentioned above, after the special game of the second type 9R hit H ends, the game state becomes the high base time-saving state, and after the special game of the second type 9R hit J ends, it becomes the normal state. When the notification image notifying the second type 9R hit is displayed in the chance presentation, it is difficult to distinguish which second type 9R hit has been won, and the presentation during the jackpot notifies the player which hit it has been. Details of the presentation during the jackpot that notifies the player which jackpot it has been will be described later.

Moreover, as will be explained in more detail later using a flow chart, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 19B of the second large prize opening 17 during the small win game that triggers the transition to the special pattern H, special pattern I, or special pattern J in the high base time-saving state, the game state after the small win game ends will transition from the high base time-saving state to the normal state.

(Pre-judgment table for jackpot lottery)
30 and 31 are diagrams showing pre-determination tables to be referred to in order to determine in advance the result of the jackpot lottery for the gaming machine 1. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol. Fig. 31 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol.

Specifically, FIG. 31(a) is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol, which is referenced during the period from the end of the jackpot to the 30th spin of the variable display. FIG. 31(b) is a diagram showing a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol, which is referenced during the period from the end of the jackpot to the 31st spin of the variable display, and after the next variable display after the special miss a is established.

As shown in Figures 30 and 31, the pre-judgment table for the jackpot lottery corresponds to a special symbol random number value, a random number value for reach judgment, a random number value for special symbol variation, winning information, and a start winning designation command.

As will be described in more detail later, when a game ball enters the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15, a special symbol random number value for that winning, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for special symbol variation are obtained. By using these obtained random number values and a pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery, it becomes possible to determine the lottery result for the variable display based on that winning before the variable display based on that winning starts.

The jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in Figures 30 and 31 and the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 26, 27, or 29 are similar tables. However, they differ in that the jackpot lottery pre-determination table is referenced when the game ball enters the starting hole, whereas the special symbol variation pattern determination table is referenced when the special symbol begins to vary.

The common part between the pre-judgment table for the big win lottery and the special symbol variation pattern determination table is the allocation of variation patterns for the lottery results of big win, small win, and special miss. Therefore, for variations that result in big win, small win, and special miss, the planned variation pattern and performance content can be grasped at the pre-judgment stage, making it possible to perform performance (pre-reading performance) for the planned variation before the variation display begins. The pre-reading performance will be described later.

The difference between the pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery and the special symbol variation pattern determination table is the distribution of variation patterns for normal misses. Specifically, the pre-determination table for the jackpot lottery does not have a distribution of variation patterns according to the reserved number, whereas the special symbol variation pattern determination table does have a distribution of variation patterns according to the reserved number.

Specifically, the distribution of the random number values for reach determination for a normal miss in Figure 30 ("0 to 89", "90 to 99") is different from the distribution of the random number values for reach determination for a normal miss (reserved numbers "0, 1") in Figures 26 and 27 ("0 to 69", "70 to 99"), and is the same as the distribution of the random number values for reach determination for a normal miss (reserved numbers "2, 3") in Figures 26 and 27 ("0 to 89", "90 to 99").

In other words, even if the first special symbol is a normal miss, if the random number value for reach determination is "70 to 89", it may result in a reach miss (reserved number "0, 1") or a non-reach miss (reserved number "2, 3") depending on the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. Since it is impossible to know the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation at the pre-determination stage, only the random number value for reach determination, "90 to 99", which will result in a reach regardless of the number of reserved balls, is pre-determined as a reach fluctuation performance.

Therefore, when the first special symbol is a normal miss, if the random number value for reach determination is between 90 and 99, it is possible to perform a look-ahead performance that confirms a reach, but if the random number value for reach determination is between 70 and 89, it is not possible to perform a look-ahead performance that confirms a reach, and only look-ahead performance that makes it likely that a reach will occur can be executed.

Similarly, since the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation cannot be known at the pre-judgment stage, if the first special symbol is a normal miss and the random number value for reach judgment is "0 to 69", it cannot be known in advance whether a normal fluctuation or a shortened fluctuation will occur. Note that a normal miss with the second special symbol may also result in a situation similar to that of a normal miss with the first special symbol described above.

(Display screen of image display device)
Next, in order to explain the look-ahead presentation, we will move away from the explanation of the tables stored in the main ROM 110c and use FIG. 32 to give an overview of the screen displayed on the image display device 31.

Figure 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the image display device 31 of the gaming machine 1. The decorative patterns 36 are composed of a left pattern 36L, a middle pattern 36C, a right pattern 36R, and a fourth pattern 36Z. The left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R are displayed in the center of the display screen. The fourth pattern 36Z is displayed in the bottom left of the display screen.

At the bottom center of the image display device 31, a change image 40 corresponding to the currently occurring change is displayed. On the left side of the change image 40, a first reserved image 41 (1) of the first reserved symbol of the first special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the first to wait for a change) and a first reserved image 41 (2) of the second reserved symbol of the first special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the second to wait for a change) are displayed. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is the maximum value of four, a first reserved image 41 (3) of the third reserved symbol of the first special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the third to wait for a change) and a first reserved image 41 (4) of the fourth reserved symbol of the first special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the fourth to wait for a change) are displayed to the left of the first reserved image (2).

A second reserved image 42 (1) of the first reserved second special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the first to be changed) is displayed to the right of the variable image 40. When the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value of four, a second reserved image 42 (2) of the second reserved second special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the second to be changed), a second reserved image 42 (3) of the third reserved second special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the third to be changed), and a second reserved image 42 (4) of the fourth reserved second special symbol (a reserved symbol that will be the fourth to be changed) are displayed to the right of the second reserved image (1).

The fourth pattern 36Z, the first reserved number image 43, and the second reserved number image 44 are displayed in the lower left of the image display device 31. The first reserved number image indicates the reserved number of the first special pattern in numbers. The second reserved number image indicates the reserved number of the second special pattern in numbers. The number of images of the first reserved image 41 is the same as the number shown in the first reserved number image 43, and the number of images of the second reserved image 42 is the same as the number shown in the second reserved number image 44.

When the number of reserved first special symbols increases due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 14, a first reserved image 41 and a first reserved number image 43 corresponding to the increased reserved number are displayed. When the number of reserved second special symbols increases due to a game ball entering the second starting hole 15, a second reserved image 42 and a second reserved number image 44 corresponding to the increased reserved number are displayed.

When the number of reserved first special symbols decreases as the first special symbol starts to change, a first reserved image 41 and a first reserved number image 43 corresponding to the number of reserved symbols after the decrease are displayed. When the number of reserved second special symbols decreases as the second special symbol starts to change, a second reserved image 42 and a second reserved number image 44 corresponding to the number of reserved symbols after the decrease are displayed.

The display change of the first reserved image 41 in response to an increase/decrease in the reserved number of the first special pattern is a change presentation accompanied by a predetermined time of animation, whereas the display change of the first reserved number image 43 is a change presentation without animation that is shorter than the predetermined time.

Therefore, the execution time of the display change effect of the first reserved image 41 in response to an increase/decrease in the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is longer than the execution time of the display change effect of the first reserved number image 43 in response to an increase/decrease in the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol. Similarly, the execution time of the display change effect of the second reserved image 42 in response to an increase/decrease in the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is longer than the execution time of the display change effect of the second reserved number image 44 in response to an increase/decrease in the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol.

When the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the variable image 40 becomes non-displayable. As the variable image 40 becomes non-displayable, the first reserved image 41(1) moves to the position where the variable image 40 was displayed and changes to the variable image 40. As the first reserved image 41(1) moves, the first reserved image 41(2) moves to the position where the first reserved image 41(1) was displayed and changes to the first reserved image 41(1). When the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the second reserved image 42 also moves and changes in display in the same way as the first reserved image 41.

The first reserved image 41 is composed of images of the same design in multiple colors (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow). The first reserved image 41 indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the pending display change by the display color. The likelihood of a jackpot according to the display color of the first reserved image 41 increases in the order of rainbow, red, green, yellow, blue, and white. In addition, the display color of the first reserved image 41 can only be changed to a display color that has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the current display color.

The display color of the first reserved image 41 to be displayed is determined based on the advance judgment of the jackpot lottery described above. In this way, the performance that is performed based on the advance judgment of the jackpot lottery will be referred to as a "pre-reading performance" hereafter. Furthermore, among the pre-reading performances, those that change the display color of the first reserved image 41 or the second reserved image 42 will be referred to as a "pre-reading reserve change performance" hereafter.

In the pre-reading hold change performance, the first hold image 41 can be displayed in rainbow, red, and green display colors only if the change display planned for the hold is a reach change as determined in advance. On the other hand, the first hold image 41 in yellow, blue, and white display colors is displayed regardless of whether the change is a reach change or a non-reach change.

As described above, the pre-reading effect is performed to suggest the possibility of a jackpot in the display of the pending ball that is the subject of the pre-reading, but it may also be performed to suggest the possibility of a specific miss occurring. Specifically, the pre-reading effect may be performed based on the determination that a special miss a will occur under normal conditions in a pre-judgment of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, the prediction effect may be performed according to the remaining number of low base time-saving times (B) without being based on a prior judgment of the jackpot lottery. As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 suggests a transition of the game state to the normal state when the game state is in the low base time-saving state by executing a specific presentation mode, but it may also be performed by a prediction effect.

(Normal symbol determination table)
Returning to the explanation of the tables stored in the main ROM 110c, Fig. 33 is a diagram showing various determination tables for normal symbols of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 33(a) is a diagram showing the normal symbol determination table of the gaming machine 1. In the normal symbol determination table, the game state, the win/lose determination result, the type of normal symbol, the stop symbol data, and the normal symbol designation command are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table based on the winning lottery determination table shown in FIG. 18(c), the winning/losing determination result determined based on the normal symbol random number value, and the current game state, and determines the normal symbol and stop symbol data. The main CPU 110a determines a normal symbol designation command based on the determined normal symbol and stop symbol data, and transmits the determined normal symbol designation command to the performance control board 120.

Figure 33 (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table. In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the game state, the win/lose judgment result, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, and the normal symbol fluctuation designation command are associated. Note that in each game state, the fluctuation time is the same whether a win is judged or a loss is judged, but the fluctuation time may be made different depending on the win/lose judgment.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33(b) based on the winning lottery determination table shown in FIG. 18(c), the winning/losing determination result determined based on the normal symbol random number value, and the current game state, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern. The main CPU 110a determines a normal symbol variation designation command based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and transmits the determined normal symbol designation command to the performance control board 120.

(Auxiliary Game Control Table)
34 is a diagram showing an auxiliary game table of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 34(a) is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table. In the auxiliary game control table, game states, stopped symbol data, opening time, table number of the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table, and ending time are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game control table based on the stopped symbol data and determines the opening time, the table number of the auxiliary game movable piece control table, and the ending time.

(Table for controlling opening and closing of movable pieces for auxiliary play)
34B is a diagram showing an auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table. In the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table, the table number of the auxiliary game movable piece control table, the number of times the movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the movable piece 15b, and the closing time of the movable piece 15b are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table based on the table number of the auxiliary game movable piece control table, and determines the number of times the movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the movable piece 15b, and the closing time of the movable piece 15b.

(Various storage areas)
35A and 35B are diagrams showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110b of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 35A is a diagram showing a special symbol storage area. The special symbol storage area has a 0th storage section corresponding to the change, a first special symbol storage area in which judgment information obtained when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 14 is stored, and a second special symbol storage area in which judgment information obtained when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 15 is stored.

The first special symbol memory area has a first memory section corresponding to the first reservation, a second memory section corresponding to the second reservation, a third memory section corresponding to the third reservation, and a fourth memory section corresponding to the fourth reservation. Similarly, the second special symbol memory area has a first memory section corresponding to the first reservation, a second memory section corresponding to the second reservation, a third memory section corresponding to the third reservation, and a fourth memory section corresponding to the fourth reservation.

The number of judgment information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit of the first special pattern storage area is the first special pattern reserved number (U1), and the number of judgment information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit of the second special pattern storage area is the second special pattern reserved number (U2).

Figure 35 (b) is a diagram showing each memory section of the special symbol memory area. As shown in Figure 35 (b), each memory section of the first special symbol memory area and the second special symbol memory area has an area for storing a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a random number value for special symbol variation, and a random number value for reach determination.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 14 and judgment information is acquired, the acquired judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections of the first special symbol memory area in which judgment information is not stored. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 15 and judgment information is acquired, the acquired judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol memory area in which judgment information is not stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is met, the judgment information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol memory area is shifted to the 0th memory section of the special symbol memory area. Similarly, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the judgment information stored in the first memory section of the second special symbol memory area is shifted to the 0th memory section of the special symbol memory area. Then, when performing the variable display of the special symbol for which the start condition is met, the judgment information shifted to the 0th memory section is referenced to perform the variable display of the special symbol.

Figure 35 (c) is a diagram showing the normal symbol determination area. The normal symbol storage area has a 0th memory section corresponding to the change, a 1st memory section corresponding to the 1st reservation, a 2nd memory section corresponding to the 2nd reservation, a 3rd memory section corresponding to the 3rd reservation, and a 4th memory section corresponding to the 4th reservation.

Figure 35 (d) is a diagram showing each memory section of the normal symbol memory area. As shown in Figure 35 (d), each memory section of the normal symbol memory area is provided with an area for storing a normal symbol random number value. Since there is only one normal symbol fluctuation pattern for each win/loss determination result in each game state, no normal symbol fluctuation random number value is provided for allocating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

When a normal pattern random number value is obtained by the game ball passing through the normal pattern gate 13, the obtained judgment information is stored in the smallest numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections of the normal pattern memory area in which no judgment information is stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is met, the judgment information stored in the first memory section of the normal pattern storage area is shifted to the 0th memory section of the normal pattern storage area. Then, when the variable display of the normal pattern for which the start condition is met is performed, the judgment information shifted to the 0th memory section is referenced to perform the variable display of the normal pattern.

Next, we will use a flowchart to explain in detail how the game progresses on the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

(Main processing of the main control board)
36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. The main processing is started when power is supplied to the main control board 110 by the power supply board 175 and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process in step S10. In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a loads the game control program and game control data from the main ROM 110c into the main RAM 110b in response to power-on. The main CPU 110a then determines whether or not to restore data based on the on/off state of the RAM clear SW 111a provided on the rear of the gaming machine 1 at the time the power is turned on, and the power interruption occurrence information and the contents of the checksum backed up in the power interruption monitoring process (S30) at the time of the previous power interruption. If it is determined that the data should be restored, the data in the main RAM 110b is restored, and if it is determined that the data should not be restored, the main RAM 110b is cleared (RAM clear). Details of the initialization process will be described later.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes a gaming machine information notification process. In the gaming machine information notification process, the main CPU 110a generates a gaming machine information notification command for notifying the frame control board 160 of the gaming status of the gaming machine 1, including the progress and stop status of the game, and transmits the generated gaming machine information notification command to the frame control board 160. Details of the gaming machine information notification process of the main control board 110 will be described later.

Next, in step S30, the main CPU 110a executes a power interruption monitoring process. In the power interruption monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not a power interruption has occurred in the gaming machine 1. If a power interruption has occurred, the main CPU 110a sends a launch prohibition command to the launch control unit 170, causing the launch CPU 170a to stop the flow of electricity to the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b, and to stop the launch of game balls. The main CPU 110a also clears the output port, creates and saves a checksum for the main RAM 110b, and sets the power interruption occurrence information, and then sets access to the main RAM 110b to be prohibited, in preparation for a power interruption. The power interruption monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S40, the main CPU 110a performs a game random number value update process. In the game random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation. Next, in step S50, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. In the initial random number value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol initial random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

The main CPU 110a then repeats the loop process from step S20 to step S50. During this loop process, the main CPU 110a executes the timer interrupt process described below by generating a clock pulse at a predetermined period (e.g., 2 ms) by a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110.

(Main control board initialization process)
37 and 38 are diagrams showing a flowchart of the initialization process of the gaming machine 1 in step S10 in FIG.

In step S10-1, the main CPU 110a performs a security check of the main CPU 110a and waits for processing for 2000 ms.

In step S10-2, the main CPU 110a allows access to the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S10-3, the main CPU 110a sets up the serial communication port.

Next, in step S10-4, the main CPU 110a sets a watchdog timer. The watchdog timer monitors whether the main control unit 110m of the main control board 110 is operating normally. The main CPU 110a periodically sends a signal to the watchdog timer indicating that it is operating normally, and the watchdog timer is cleared when the main CPU 110a receives this signal. If the processing of the main control unit 110m has stopped or if an infinite loop processing of a specific process is being performed, the watchdog timer counts up without being cleared, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined count value, the main control unit 110m is reset.

Next, in step S10-5, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the performance control board 120 and the frame control board 160. Next, in step S10-6, the main CPU 110a sends a launch permission command to the launch control unit 170.

When the launch CPU 170a receives a launch permission command, it sets a launch permission flag in the launch permission flag storage area of the launch RAM 170b. When the launch permission flag is set in the launch permission flag storage area of the launch RAM 170b, the launch CPU 170 detects input from the touch sensor 3a and the launch volume 3b, and controls the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b to enable the launch of the game ball.

Next, in step S10-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear SW 111a is on. If the RAM clear SW 111a is on, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S10-14 (FIG. 38), and if the RAM clear SW 111a is off, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S10-8.

Next, in step S10-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the power interruption occurrence information stored in the main RAM 110b is normal. If the power interruption occurrence information is normal, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-9, and if the power interruption occurrence information is not normal, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-11.

Then, in step S10-9, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S10-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the calculated checksum is normal. If the calculated checksum is normal, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S10-19, and if the calculated checksum is not normal, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S10-11.

The calculated checksum is determined to be normal if the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power outage and stored in main RAM 110b matches the newly calculated checksum in step S10-9, and is determined to be abnormal if they do not match.

In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a sends an unrecoverable command to the performance control board 120. When the performance control board 120 receives the unrecoverable command, it executes a process to display an unrecoverable notification on the image display device 31.

"Notification of impossibility of recovery" refers to processing such as displaying an image on the image display device 31 to notify that the game cannot be recovered, emitting a specific light from a performance lighting device such as the first performance lighting device 340a, or outputting a specific sound from the sound output device 32 ("Game cannot be recovered" or "Please clear the RAM").

In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a sends a launch prohibition command to the launch control unit 170 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a prohibits access to the main RAM 110b, and then executes an infinite loop process.

In step S10-14, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S10-15, the main CPU 110a sets the RAM for when backup is not valid. Next, in step S10-16, the main CPU 110a clears the watchdog timer.

Next, in step S10-17, the main CPU 110a sends a RAM clear command to the performance control board 120, and proceeds to step S10-18. When the performance control board 120 receives the RAM clear command, it executes processing to execute a RAM clear preparation notification.

The "RAM clear preparation notification" refers to processing such as displaying an image on the image display device 31 to notify that a RAM clear will be performed, emitting a specific light from a performance lighting device such as the first performance lighting device 340a, or outputting a specific sound from the audio output device 32 ("RAM clear in progress").

Next, in step S10-18, the main CPU 110a performs initial settings for devices around the CPU, and proceeds to step S10-22. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets the output settings for the performance control board 120, the settings for the CTC (counter timer circuit) to be used, and the interrupt timer (2 ms) for the CTC to be used, etc.

In step S10-19, the main CPU 110a performs RAM settings when the backup is valid. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110b, and then restores the data in each used area of the main RAM 110b based on the power interruption information.

The data that is restored based on the power outage information includes the special symbol memory area, the special symbol special power processing data memory area, the stop symbol data memory area, the normal symbol reserved memory area, the normal symbol normal power processing data memory area, the normal symbol data memory area, the completion information memory area, the game status flag memory area, the specific area winning flag memory area, the game status buffer, the number of rounds (R) counter, the number of balls entered into the large winning slot (C) counter, the number of first special symbol reserved (U1) counter, the number of second special symbol reserved (U2) counter, the number of normal symbol reserved (G) counter, low base time reduction count (B) counter, high base time reduction count (J) counter, fluctuation count (L) counter, opening count (S) counter, special signal activation number (K) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, gaming machine information transmission standby timer counter, response reception standby timer counter, communication failure determination counter, maximum number of game balls acquired counter, and data stored in a data storage area such as a transmission data storage area for effects.

Next, in step S10-20, the main CPU 110a performs initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, it sets the output settings for the performance control board 120, the settings for the CTC (counter timer circuit) to be used, and the interrupt timer (2 ms) for the CTC to be used.

Next, in step S10-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b is normal. If the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b is normal, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S10-22, and if the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b is not normal, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S10-21.

In step S10-22, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command corresponding to the normal state to the performance control board 120 and the frame control board 160, and proceeds to step S10-26. Note that the reason step S10-22 is performed after step S10-18 is because the normal state was set in the game status flag storage area of the main RAM 110b in step S10-15.

In step S10-23, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b is a low base time-shortened state. If the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b is a low base time-shortened state, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S10-24, and if the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b is not a low base time-shortened state, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S10-25.

In step S10-24, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command corresponding to the low base time-saving state to the performance control board 120 and the frame control board 160, and proceeds to step S10-23.

In step S10-25, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command corresponding to the high base time-saving state to the performance control board 120 and the frame control board 160, and proceeds to step S10-24.

In step S10-26, the main CPU 110a sends a game state designation command corresponding to the game state after power is restored to the performance control board 120, and ends the initialization process.

When the power is turned off in the low base time-saving state among the five game states shown in FIG. 10, the game state flag for the low base time-saving state and the count value of the game ball count counter are backed up in the game state flag memory area of the main RAM 110b in the main control board 110, and the game ball count control unit 180 of the frame control board 160 backs up the game state flag for the low base time-saving state and the count value of the game ball count counter in the game state flag memory area of the game ball count RAM 180b.

In addition, when the normal power-on operation shown in FIG. 17(a) or the main control board RAM clear power-on operation shown in FIG. 17(b) is performed, a game ball count restoration command for the restored number of game balls is sent to the main control board 110 in the initial setting process performed by the game ball count control unit 180 of the frame control board 160 described below. However, when the frame control board RAM clear power-on operation shown in FIG. 17(c) or the all RAM clear power-on operation shown in FIG. 17(d) is performed, the game ball count restoration command is not sent to the main control board 110.

(Main control board gaming machine information notification processing)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the gaming machine information notification process of the main control board 110 shown in step S20 of FIG.

In step S20-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the gaming machine information transmission waiting timer counter stored in the main RAM 110b is greater than 0. If the value of the gaming machine information transmission waiting timer counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S20-2, and if the value is not greater than 0 (is 0), the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S20-5.

The gaming machine information transmission wait timer counter is a counter used to measure the transmission period of 108 ms for the gaming machine information notification command from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 160, as shown in FIG. 13.

The counter value of the gaming machine information transmission waiting timer counter is updated by the counter update process of the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, which will be described later. Specifically, the counter value of the gaming machine information transmission waiting timer counter is updated by subtracting 2 each time the timer update process in the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms.

In step S20-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a response command has been received from the frame control board 160. If a response command has been received, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S20-3, and if a response command has not been received, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S20-8.

In step S20-3, the main CPU 110a clears the communication failure determination counter in the main RAM 110b. The communication failure determination counter is a counter used to determine whether there has been no response command to the transmission of the gaming machine information notification command from the frame control board 160 ten consecutive times.

In step S20-4, the main CPU 110a clears the response reception waiting timer counter in the main RAM 110b and proceeds to step S20-12.

In step S20-5, the main CPU 110a transmits a gaming machine information notification command to the frame control board 160. In step S20-6, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming machine information transmission waiting timer counter to "108."

In step S20-7, the main CPU 110a sets the communication failure determination counter in the main RAM 110b to the value "10" and proceeds to step S20-11.

In step S20-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the response reception waiting timer counter in the main RAM 110b is greater than 0. If the value of the response reception waiting timer counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S20-12, and if the value of the response reception waiting timer counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S20-9.

In step S20-9, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the value of the communication failure determination counter in the main RAM 110b. In step S20-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the communication failure determination counter in the main RAM 110b is greater than 0. If the value of the communication failure determination counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S20-11, and if the value of the communication failure determination counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S20-14.

In step S20-11, the main CPU 110a sets the response reception waiting timer counter in the main RAM 110b to "10." The response reception waiting timer counter is used to measure the waiting time of 10 ms from the transmission of the current gaming machine information notification command until a response command is received from the frame control board 160.

The counter value of the response reception waiting timer counter is updated by the counter update process of the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, which will be described later. Specifically, the counter value of the response reception waiting timer counter is updated by subtracting 2 each time the counter update process of the timer interrupt process is performed, because the timer update process within the timer interrupt process is performed every 2 ms.

In step S20-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a game ball number designation command has been received from the frame control board 160. If the main CPU 110a has received a game ball number designation command, it proceeds to step S20-13, and if the game ball number designation command has not been received, it ends the game machine information notification process.

The game ball count designation command, which will be described in detail later, is a command sent from the game ball count control unit 180 to the main control unit 110 when the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b of the game ball count control unit 180 of the frame control board 160 is updated.

In step S20-13, the main CPU 110a performs an update process to add or subtract the number of game balls indicated by the received game ball number designation command to the maximum number of game balls acquired counter in the main RAM 110b, and ends the gaming machine information notification process. Note that the value of the maximum number of game balls acquired counter in the main RAM 110b updated by the above update process is a different value from the game ball number counter in the game ball number RAM 180b.

In step S20-14, the main CPU 110a sends a communication failure command to the performance control board 120. When the performance control board 120 receives the communication failure command, it performs processing to cause the image display device 31 to display a communication failure notification.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition in step S20-15. The main CPU 110a sends a launch prohibition command to the launch control unit 170 in step S20-16. The launch control unit 170, which will be described in detail later, clears the launch permission flag when it receives the launch prohibition command and stops the flow of electricity to the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b.

In step S20-17, the main CPU 110a prohibits access to the main RAM 110b and then performs standby processing.

(Main control board power cutoff monitoring process)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power supply cutoff monitoring process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition in step S30-1. Next, the main CPU 110a determines in step S30-2 whether or not a power outage has occurred to the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that a power outage has occurred when a power outage detection signal is input from a power supply detection circuit (not shown) provided on the power supply board 175.

If the main CPU 110a determines that a power outage has occurred, it proceeds to step S30-4, and if it determines that a power outage has not occurred, it proceeds to step S30-3.

In step S30-3, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt permission and ends the power interruption monitoring process.

In step S30-4, the main CPU 110a sends a launch prohibition command to the launch control unit 170. Next, in step S30-5, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. Next, in step S30-6, the main CPU 110a sends a power-off command to the launch control unit 170 and the game ball count control unit 180 of the frame control board 160.

In step S30-7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum of the data in the used area of the main RAM 110b and sets it in a specified area of the main RAM 110b.

The data that the main CPU 110a targets when calculating the checksum are the special symbol memory area, the special symbol special signal processing data memory area, the stop symbol data memory area, the normal symbol reserved memory area, the normal symbol normal signal processing data memory area, the normal symbol data memory area, the completion information memory area, the game status flag memory area, the specific area winning flag memory area, the game status buffer, the number of rounds (R) counter, the number of balls entered into the large winning slot (C) counter, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) counter, and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) counter. , normal symbol reserved number (G) counter, low base time shortening count (B) counter, high base time shortening count (J) counter, fluctuation count (L) counter, release count (S) counter, special signal activation number (K) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, gaming machine information transmission standby timer counter, response reception standby timer counter, communication failure determination counter, maximum number of game balls acquired counter, and performance transmission data storage area are data stored in such data storage areas.

Next, in step S30-8, the main CPU 110a sets a backup flag to be referenced when power is restored from the power outage in a specified area of the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S30-9, the main CPU 110a prohibits access to the main RAM 110b. Thereafter, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop process and performs a standby process until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. The main CPU 110a executes timer interrupt processing at every generation period (e.g., 2 ms) at which a clock pulse signal is generated by a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, except in special cases such as when the power is turned on or off.

When a clock pulse signal is generated, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

Next, in step S110, the main CPU 110a performs a counter update process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, gaming machine information transmission wait timer counter, and response reception wait timer counter stored in the main RAM 110b. In the counter update process, each counter is decremented by 2. The reason each counter is decremented by 2 in the counter update process is that these counters indicate time, and because the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the counter update process within the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms.

The special symbol time counter is a counter used by the main CPU 110a when determining whether the change of the special symbol has passed the change time or whether the stopping of the special symbol has passed the stop time. The special game timer counter is a counter used by the main CPU 110a when controlling the opening and closing control of the first large prize opening 16 and the second large prize opening 17. The normal symbol time counter is a counter used when determining whether the change of the normal symbol has passed the change time or whether the stopping of the normal symbol has passed the stop time. The auxiliary game timer counter is a counter used by the main CPU 110a when controlling the opening and closing control of the second start opening 15. Details of the control using each of these counters will be described later.

As explained in the gaming machine information notification process of the main control board 110 shown in FIG. 39, the gaming machine information transmission wait timer counter is a counter used when the main CPU 110a transmits a gaming machine information notification command from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 160. The response reception wait timer counter is a counter used when the main CPU 110a determines whether communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 160 is normal or not.

Next, in step S120, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, normal symbol random number value, and special symbol random number value. Specifically, the main CPU 110a increments each random number value and random number counter by 1. When the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter has completed one cycle), the main CPU 110a resets the random number counter to 0 and updates each random number value from the initial random number value at that time.

Next, in step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol initial random number value.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been input to each of the general winning hole detection SW 12a, the gate detection SW 13a, the first starting hole detection SW 14a, the second starting hole detection SW 15a, the first large winning hole detection SW 16a, the second large winning hole detection SW 17a, and the specific area detection SW 18a, and executes a predetermined process if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

Next, in step S300, the main CPU 110a executes special chart special electricity control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special chart special electricity processing data stored in the main RAM 110b according to the progress of the game, and executes a predetermined process based on the updated value of the special chart special electricity processing data. Details of the special chart special electricity control processing will be described later.

Next, in step S400, the main CPU 110a executes a normal map normal power control process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the normal map normal power processing data stored in the main RAM 110b in accordance with the progress of the game, and executes a predetermined process based on the updated value of the normal map normal power processing data. Details of the normal map normal power control process will be described later.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a executes a prize ball control process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the general prize ball counter, the first start prize ball counter, the second start prize ball counter, the first large prize ball counter, and the second large prize ball counter stored in the main RAM 110b, and transmits a prize ball number designation command to the frame control board 160 to instruct the awarding of the number of game balls indicated by each counter.

Next, the main CPU 110a executes a complete determination process in step S600. The complete determination process is a process for determining whether or not to activate a function (complete function) that restricts further game play when the maximum number of game balls acquired in the gaming machine 1 exceeds the upper limit of 95,000 balls per day.

Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum number of acquired game balls counter in the main RAM 110b has exceeded 95,000. If the maximum number of acquired game balls counter has exceeded 95,000, the main CPU 110a stores the completion information in the completion information storage area in the main RAM 110b, stores an error-related designation command indicating error 1 in the performance transmission data storage area, and sets a launch prohibition command in the transmission buffer to cause the launch control unit 170 to stop launching game balls.

The maximum number of winning game balls counter is a counter that is incremented by the number indicated by each prize ball counter when a game ball is awarded, and is decremented by 1 when a game ball is released while the counter value is 1 or greater; the minimum value of the counter is 0.

Next, the main CPU 110a executes data generation processing in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to generate drive data for the start opening/closing solenoid 15c, drive data for the first large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, drive data for the second large winning opening opening opening solenoid 17c, drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 18d, display data for the first special symbol display device 20, display data for the second special symbol display device 21, display data for the normal symbol display device 24, display data for the first special symbol reserved display device 22, display data for the second special symbol display device 23, and display data for the normal symbol reserved display device 25.

Next, in step S800, the main CPU 110a executes an output control process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a outputs the display data, drive data, and external information signals generated in the data generation process in step S700. The main CPU 110a also executes a process to transmit commands set in the performance transmission data storage area and transmission buffer of the main RAM 110b to the performance control board 120 and frame control board 160.

Next, in step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information that was saved to the stack area in step S100 to the registers of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of main control board)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the input control process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a executes a general winning port detection SW input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a detection signal from the general winning port detection SW 12a. If there has been a detection signal from the general winning port detection SW 12a, the main CPU 110a performs an update process to add a predetermined number (e.g., 1) to the general winning port prize ball counter stored in the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S220. If there has not been a detection signal from the general winning port detection SW 12a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S220 as is.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a executes the large prize opening detection SW input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the first large prize opening detection SW 16a or the second large prize opening detection SW 17a. If there is a detection signal from the first large prize opening detection SW 16a or the second large prize opening detection SW 17a, the main CPU 110a increments the large prize opening ball entry number (C) counter stored in the main RAM 110b by 1 and proceeds to step S230. If there is no detection signal from the first large prize opening detection SW 16a or the second large prize opening detection SW 17a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230. .

Next, in step S230, the main CPU 110a executes the first start hole detection SW input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection SW 14a. If the main CPU 110a has not input a detection signal from the first start hole detection SW 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds directly to step S240. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection SW 14a, the main CPU 110a executes a prize ball counter update process, acquisition of various random number values, a pre-determination process, and setting of various commands, and proceeds to step S240. Details of the first start hole detection SW input process will be described later.

Next, in step S240, the main CPU 110a executes a second start hole detection SW input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection SW 15a. If a detection signal has not been input from the second start hole detection SW 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds directly to step S250. If a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection SW 15a, the main CPU 110a executes a prize ball counter update process, acquisition of various random number values, advance judgment process, and setting of various commands, and proceeds to step S250.

The details of the second start hole detection SW input process are the same as those of the first start hole detection SW input process, which will be described in detail later. Specifically, the second start hole detection SW input process replaces the items provided for the first start hole with items provided for the second start hole, such as replacing the "first special symbol reserved number (U1)" in the first start hole detection SW input process with the "second special symbol reserved number (U2)" and replacing the "first start hole detection SW 14a" with the "second start hole detection SW 15a."

Next, in step S250, the main CPU 110a executes a specific area detection SW input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a detection signal from the specific area detection SW 18a. If there has been no detection signal input from the specific area detection SW 18a, the main CPU 110a proceeds directly to step S260. If there has been a detection signal input from the specific area detection SW 18a, the main CPU 110a executes a predetermined process and proceeds to step S260. Details of the specific area detection SW input process will be described later.

Next, in step S260, the main CPU 110a executes a gate detection SW input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a detection signal from the gate detection SW 13a. If there has been an input of a detection signal from the gate detection SW 13a and the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 3 or less, the main CPU 110a increments the number of reserved normal symbols (G) by 1, obtains a normal symbol random number value, and stores the obtained judgment information in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections of the normal symbol storage area in which no judgment information is stored.

Even if a detection signal is input from the gate detection SW 13a, if the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 4, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S270. Also, if there is no detection signal input from the gate detection SW 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the input control process.

(First start port detection SW input processing of the main control board)
Figure 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first start hole detection SW input processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a detection signal from the first start hole detection SW 14a. If there has been a detection signal from the first start hole detection SW 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2. If there has not been a detection signal from the first start hole detection SW 14a, the main CPU 110a ends the first start hole detection SW input process.

Next, in step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs an update process to add a predetermined number (e.g., 3) to the prize ball counter for the starting hole.

Next, in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the count value of the first special symbol reserved number (U1) counter is less than 4. If the count value of the first special symbol reserved number (U1) counter is less than 4, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S230-4. If the count value of the first special symbol reserved number (U1) counter is not less than 4, the main CPU 110a ends the first start hole detection SW input process.

Next, in step S230-4, the main CPU 110a reads the counter value of the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) stored in the memory area of the main RAM 110b, adds 1 to the read count value of the number of reserved first special symbols (U1), and stores the result in the memory area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S230-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the jackpot random number value and stores the obtained jackpot random number value in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections in the first special symbol memory area provided in the main RAM 110b in which no jackpot random number value is stored.

Next, in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires a special symbol random number value and stores the acquired special symbol random number value in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections in the first special symbol memory area provided in the main RAM 110b in which no special symbol random number value is stored.

Next, in step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for reach determination, and stores the acquired random number value in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first to fourth memory sections in the first special symbol memory area provided in the main RAM 110b in which a random number value for reach determination is not stored.

Next, in step S230-8, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for special symbol variation, and stores the acquired random number value for special symbol variation in the smallest-numbered memory section among the first memory section to the fourth memory section in the first special symbol storage area provided in the main RAM 110b in which no random number value for special symbol variation is stored.

Next, the main CPU 110a executes a pre-determination process in step S230-9. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to a pre-determination table (FIG. 30) for the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol stored in the main ROM 120c, and determines the winning information based on the currently acquired jackpot random number value, special symbol random number value, special symbol variation random number value, and reach determination random number value.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information determined in step S230-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

The performance control board 120, based on the start winning designation command received from the main CPU 110a, can execute a look-ahead performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot or special miss before the special pattern based on the current winning into the first starting hole 14 starts to change. The look-ahead performance can be performed over multiple changes, such as changing the display mode (e.g., color, design, etc.) of the first reserved image 41 displayed on the image display device 31 or displaying a special background image, or the winning sound output at the start winning can be a special winning sound, or a special light can be emitted from the performance lighting device at the time of winning.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage number designation command indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) determined in step S230-4 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b, and ends the first start hole detection SW input process. Based on the special symbol storage number designation command received from the main CPU 110a, the performance control board 120 performs processing to cause the image display device 31 to increase the display of the first reserved image 41 and the audio output device 32 to output a winning sound.

(Specific area detection SW input processing of main control board)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the specific area detection SW input processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a detection signal from the specific area detection SW 18a. If there has been no detection signal from the specific area detection SW 18a, the main CPU 110a ends the specific area detection SW input process. If there has been a detection signal from the specific area detection SW 18a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S250-2.

Next, in step S250-2, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area winning flag in the specific area winning flag storage area of the main RAM 110b. The specific area winning flag is a flag indicating that a gaming ball has won a specific area 19B provided in the second large winning opening 17. As described above, a second type win is a big win that occurs when a gaming ball wins a specific area 19B provided in the second large winning opening 17.

Next, in step S250-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area winning designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S250-4, the main CPU 110a stores the game state stored in the game state flag in the main RAM 110b (the game state when the game ball enters the specific area 19B) in the game state buffer in the main RAM 110b, and ends the specific area detection SW input process.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
Figure 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special chart special electricity control processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special chart special signal processing data stored in the main RAM 110b.

In step S302, the main CPU 110a executes a process corresponding to the loaded special symbol special electricity processing data. Specifically, if the special symbol special electricity processing data is 0, the special symbol memory determination process is executed in step S310; if the special symbol special electricity processing data is 1, the special symbol change process is executed in step S320; if the special electricity processing data is 2, the special symbol stop process is executed in step S330; if the special symbol special electricity processing data is 3, the big win game process is executed in step S340; if the special symbol special electricity processing data is 4, the small win game process is executed in step S350; if the special symbol special electricity processing data is 5, the big win game end process is executed in step S360. Then, after executing any of the processes, the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol special electricity control process. Details of each control process will be described later.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
46 and 47 are diagrams showing a flowchart of the special symbol memory determination process of the gaming machine 1.

In step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special pattern is changing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to a special pattern time counter stored in the main RAM 110b, and if the counter value is 0, it determines that the special pattern is not changing, and if the counter value is not 0, it determines that the special pattern is changing. If the special pattern is changing, the main CPU 110a ends the special pattern memory determination process. If the special pattern is not changing, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) stored in the main RAM 110b is 0. If the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is 0, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S310-4. If the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is not 0, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S310-3.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) in the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S310-9.

In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reserved number (U1) stored in the main RAM 110b is 0. If the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is 0, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S310-6. If the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is not 0, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S310-5.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) in the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S310-9.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the customer waiting state flag stored in the main RAM 110b is set. The customer waiting state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming machine 1 is not performing a special game, has zero reserved balls, and is not displaying any changes (a customer waiting state). If the customer waiting flag is not set, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S310-7. If the customer waiting flag is set, the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol memory determination process.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in the customer waiting state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command, which indicates that the gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

In step S310-9, the main CPU 110a executes a shift process of the storage area of the main RAM 110b. Specifically, if the second special symbol reserved number is subtracted by 1 in step S310-3, the data stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol storage area of the main RAM 110b is written to the 0th storage section of the special symbol storage area, and the data stored in the second storage section to the 4th storage section are each written to the previous storage section. Also, if the first special symbol reserved number is subtracted by 1 in step S310-5, the data stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol storage area of the main RAM 110b is written to the 0th storage section of the special symbol storage area, and the data stored in the second storage section to the 4th storage section are each written to the previous storage section.

In addition, any data that was already stored in the 0th memory section of the special pattern memory area before this memory area shift process was performed will be erased because new data will be overwritten by this memory area shift process.

Note that the display of the second special symbol is given priority over the display of the first special symbol (special 2 priority consumption), but the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel (simultaneous change of special 1 and special 2), or the display of the first special symbol may be given priority over the display of the second special symbol (special 1 priority consumption).

In step S310-10, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol reserved number designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b. Specifically, if the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in step S310-3, it sets a special symbol reserved number designation command indicating the subtracted second special symbol reserved number in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b. In addition, if the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reserved number (U1) in step S310-5, it sets a special symbol reserved number designation command indicating the subtracted first special symbol reserved number in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

The performance control board 120 refers to the special symbol memory count designation command based on the current memory area shift process received from the main CPU 110a and performs processing to cause the image display device 31 to display a new variable image 40, reduce the number of first reserved images 41 and second reserved images 42, and update the images of the first reserved number image 43 and second reserved number image 44.

In step S310-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the low base time reduction count (B) stored in the main RAM 110b is 1 or greater. If the low base time reduction count (B) stored in the main RAM 110b is 1 or greater, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S310-12. If the low base time reduction count (B) stored in the main RAM 110b is not 1 or greater, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S310-14.

In step S310-12, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the low base time reduction count (B) stored in the main RAM 110b and stores the result.

In step S310-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the low base time reduction count (B) minus 1 is 0. If the low base time reduction count (B) minus 1 is 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S310-20. If the low base time reduction count (B) minus 1 is not 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S311.

In step S310-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of high base time-saving times (J) stored in the main RAM 110b is 1 or greater. If the number of high base time-saving times (J) stored in the main RAM 110b is 1 or greater, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S310-15. If the number of high base time-saving times (J) stored in the main RAM 110b is not 1 or greater, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S311.

In step S310-15, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the high base time reduction count (J) stored in the main RAM 110b and stores the result.

In step S310-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the high base time-saving count (J) minus 1 is 0. If the high base time-saving count (J) minus 1 is 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S310-20. If the high base time-saving count (J) minus 1 is not 0, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S311.

In step S310-20, the main CPU 110a sets the normal game state in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S311.

In this embodiment, one of the conditions for transitioning from the high base time-saving state to the normal state is when the high base time-saving count (J) becomes 0 (at the end of the 100th miss fluctuation in the high base time-saving state, "YES" in step S310-16 of FIG. 46, S310-20). However, as described above, other conditions include the end of a special game (e.g., a second type 9R win J) that transitions to the normal state after the special game ends, or when the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during a small win that triggers a transition to a special game (e.g., a second type 9R win H) that transitions to the high base time-saving state after the special game ends.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the high base time-saving state to the normal state are as described above, but the conditions may be based on the number of times the normal pattern changes, the number of times the second start hole 15 is opened when the normal pattern is won, or the number of times the normal pattern is won.

In other words, the condition for transitioning from the high base time-saving state to the normal state may be, for example, that the variable display of the normal symbol has finished once or a predetermined number of times in the high base time-saving state, that the second start hole 15 has opened once or a predetermined number of times due to a winning normal symbol, or that a winning judgment of the normal symbol has been made once or a predetermined number of times.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to various tables stored in the main ROM 110c shown in Figures 18, 19, and 20 based on the jackpot random number value and special pattern random number value newly stored in the 0th memory section, and the type of special pattern display device of the data shifted to the 0th memory section, and determines the type of special pattern, stop pattern data, etc. Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol (FIG. 26 (normal state), FIG. 27 (low base time-saving state), FIG. 28 (high base time-saving state)) stored in the main ROM 110c and the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol (FIG. 29) based on the type of special symbol determined in step S311, the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol variation newly stored in the 0th memory unit, and the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol that will start to vary.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

The performance control board 120 performs processing to execute a performance change according to the special symbol change pattern based on the change pattern designation command received from the main CPU 110a.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving count designation command corresponding to the low base time-saving count (B) and the high base time-saving count (J) stored in the game status flag storage area of the main RAM 110b in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

In step S316, the main CPU 110a executes processing to start the variable display of the special pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110b to cause the first special pattern display device 20 or the second special pattern display device 21 to perform a variable display of the special pattern.

Next, in step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110b. The special symbol time counter is decremented every 2 ms in the counter update process in the timer interrupt process in step S110 (FIG. 41) described above.

Next, in step S318, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data storage area of the main RAM 110b to 1, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

In addition, in the data generation process in the timer interrupt process of step S600 (FIG. 41) described above, the main CPU 110a creates data for turning on and off the LED of the first special pattern display device 20 or the second special pattern display device 21 based on the display data set in step S316. Then, in the output control process in the timer interrupt process of step S700 (FIG. 41) described above, the main CPU 110a outputs the LED turning on and off data created in step S600 to the first special pattern display device 20 or the second special pattern display device 21, thereby starting the variable display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 20 or the second special pattern display device 21.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the gaming machine 1.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a judges whether the special symbol that starts the variable display is a jackpot. Specifically, the main CPU 110a judges whether the special symbol that starts the variable display is a jackpot based on the jackpot random number value newly stored in the 0th memory section of the special symbol storage area by referring to the jackpot selection determination table (FIG. 18(a)) for the first special symbol display device stored in the main ROM 110c if the data newly stored in the 0th memory section has been shifted from the first special symbol storage area, and by referring to the jackpot selection determination table (FIG. 18(b)) for the second special symbol display device stored in the main ROM 110c if the data newly stored in the 0th memory section has been shifted from the second special symbol storage area.

Then, if the special symbol that starts the variable display is a jackpot, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2. If the special symbol that starts the variable display is not a jackpot, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot symbol determination table (FIG. 19(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the special symbol random number value newly stored in the 0th memory unit and the type of special symbol display device that will start the variable display, determines the type of special symbol that will start the variable display and the stopped symbol data, and stores the determined stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data area of the main RAM 110b.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets a pattern designation command corresponding to the stop pattern data determined in step S311-2 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a stores the game status information stored in the game status flag in the main RAM 110b (game status information at the time the jackpot determination process is executed) in the game status buffer in the main RAM 110b, and ends the jackpot determination process.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special symbol that starts the variable display is a small win. Specifically, when the data newly stored in the 0th memory section of the special symbol storage area is shifted from the second special symbol storage area, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table (FIG. 18(b)) for the second special symbol display device stored in the main ROM 110c based on the jackpot random number value newly stored in the 0th memory section, and determines whether the special symbol that starts the variable display is a small win.

The reason why the small win determination is performed only when the data newly stored in the 0th memory section of the special pattern memory area is shifted from the 2nd special pattern memory area is because it is set to determine a small win only for the 2nd special pattern (Figure 18 (b)). Therefore, if the data newly stored in the 0th memory section is shifted from the 1st special pattern memory area, the main CPU 110a determines that the special pattern that starts the variable display is not a small win.

Note that the small win is determined based on the second special symbol only, but the small win may be determined based on both the first and second special symbols, or based on the first special symbol only.

Then, if the special symbol that starts the variable display is a small win, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-6. If the special symbol that starts the variable display is not a small win, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-8.

Next, in step S311-6, the main CPU 110a executes a small win symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the small win symbol determination table (FIG. 19(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the special symbol random number value newly stored in the 0th memory unit, determines the type of special symbol and the stopping symbol data that will start the variable display, and stores the determined stopping symbol data in the stopping symbol data area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S311-7, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-6 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b, and ends the jackpot determination process.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special symbol that starts the variable display is a special miss. Specifically, if the data newly stored in the 0th memory section of the special symbol storage area is shifted from the 1st special symbol storage area, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table (FIG. 18(a)) for the 1st special symbol display device stored in the main ROM 110c based on the jackpot random number value newly stored in the 0th memory section, and determines whether the special symbol that starts the variable display is a special miss.

The reason why a special miss is determined only when the data newly stored in the 0th memory section of the special symbol memory area is shifted from the 1st special symbol memory area is because it is set to determine a special miss only for the 1st special symbol (see FIG. 18). Therefore, if the data newly stored in the 0th memory section is shifted from the 2nd special symbol memory area, the main CPU 110a determines that the special symbol that starts the variable display is not a special miss.

Then, if the special symbol that starts the variable display is a special miss, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S311-9. If the special symbol that starts the variable display is not a special miss, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S311-11.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a executes a special losing symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special losing symbol determination table (FIG. 20(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the special symbol random number value newly stored in the 0th memory unit, determines the type of special symbol and the stopping symbol data that will start the variable display, and stores the determined stopping symbol data in the stopping symbol data area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-9 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b, and ends the jackpot determination process.

In step S311-11, the main CPU 110a performs a normal losing symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal losing symbol determination table (FIG. 20(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the type of special symbol display device that will start the variable display and the special symbol random number value newly stored in the 0th memory unit, determines the type of special symbol that will start the variable display and the stopped symbol data, and stores the determined stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data area of the main RAM 110b.

In step S311-12, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-11 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b, and ends the jackpot determination process.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special pattern change time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to a special pattern time counter stored in the main RAM 110b, and if the counter value is 0, it determines that the special pattern change time has elapsed, and if the counter value is not 0, it determines that the special pattern change time has not elapsed. If the special pattern change time has elapsed, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S320-2. If the special pattern change time has not elapsed, the main CPU 110a ends the special pattern change process.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a executes processing for stopping and displaying the special symbols. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the display data set in step S316 of the special symbol memory determination processing, and sets display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110b for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to stop and display the special symbol corresponding to the stopping symbol data set in the stopping symbol data area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a pattern determination command indicating that the special pattern has stopped in the performance transmission storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in the special symbol time counter memory area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data storage area of the main RAM 110b to 2, and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop time of the special pattern has ended. Specifically, if the special pattern time counter in the main RAM 110b is 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the stop time of the special pattern has ended, and proceeds to step S330-2. If the special pattern time counter in the main RAM 110b is not 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the stop time of the special pattern has not ended, and ends the special pattern stop processing.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the fluctuation count (L) counter in the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop pattern data stored in the stop pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b is for a jackpot. If the stop pattern data is for a jackpot, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S330-4. If the stop pattern data is not for a jackpot, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S330-11.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a normal game state flag in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S330-5, the main CPU 110a resets the low base time-saving count (B) counter and the high base time-saving count (J) counter of the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S330-6, the main CPU 110a resets the fluctuation count (L) counter of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-7, the main CPU 110a executes a first-type jackpot game preparation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines the reference destination of the first-type jackpot special game control table (FIG. 23(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the symbol stop data stored in the stop symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines an opening designation command from the reference destination of the special game control table for the first type of jackpot determined in step 330-7, and sets the determined opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

When the performance control board 120 receives an opening designation command from the main CPU 110a, it performs processing to execute the opening performance of the jackpot game using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, etc.

Next, in step S330-9, the main CPU 110a sets the start interval time. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines the opening time from the reference of the special game control table for the first type jackpot determined in step 330-7, and sets the determined opening time in the special game timer counter of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets 3 to the special chart special signal processing data storage area in the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S330-24.

In step S33-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopping pattern data stored in the stopping pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b is a small win. If the stopping pattern data is a small win, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S330-12. If the stopping pattern data is not a small win, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S330-16.

The main CPU 110a executes a small win game preparation process in step S330-12. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines the reference destination of the small win special game control table (FIG. 23(c)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the stopping symbol data stored in the stopping symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a also resets the value of the special signal operation number (K) counter.

The main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command in step S330-13. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines an opening designation command from the reference destination of the special game control table for small wins determined in step S330-12, and sets the determined opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-14, the main CPU 110a sets the start interval time. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines the opening time from the reference destination of the special game control table for small wins determined in step 330-12, and sets the determined opening time in the special game timer counter of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-15, the main CPU 110a sets 4 to the special chart special signal processing data storage area in the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S330-24.

In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the counter value of the number of fluctuations (L) in the main RAM 110b has reached a specified number (800 times). If the counter value of the number of fluctuations (L) has reached the specified number (800 times), the main CPU 110a transfers processing to step S330-17. If the counter value of the number of fluctuations (L) has not reached the specified number (800 times), the main CPU 110a transfers processing to step S330-19.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a resets the low base time reduction count (B) counter and the fluctuation count (L) counter in the main RAM 110b, and proceeds to step S330-18.

In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the game state flag for the high base time-saving state in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b, sets the high base time-saving count (J) counter in the main RAM 110b to 100, and proceeds to step S330-22.

In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop pattern data stored in the stop pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b is a special miss. If the stop pattern data is a special miss, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S330-20. If the stop pattern data is not a special miss, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S330-22.

In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a executes a game status setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special losing symbol stop setting table (FIG. 22) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the stopping symbol data stored in the stopping symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b and the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area, determines the game status when a special losing symbol stops, and sets the determined game status in the game status flag storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, the main CPU 110a executes the remaining number setting process in step S330-21. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special miss symbol stop time setting table (FIG. 22) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b and the game status flag stored in the game status flag storage area, determines the low base time reduction number (B) and high base time reduction number (J) at the time of the special miss stop, and sets the determined low base time reduction number (B) and high base time reduction number (J) at the time of the special miss stop in the low base time reduction number (B) counter and high base time reduction number (J) counter of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S330-22, the main CPU 110a generates a number designation command indicated by the low base time-saving count (B) counter in the main RAM 110b, and generates a number designation command indicated by the high base time-saving count (J) counter in the main RAM 110b, and sets the generated number designation commands in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S330-23, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special signal processing data storage area of the main RAM 110b to 0, and proceeds to step S330-24.

In step S330-24, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol stop processing.

(Jackpot Game Processing on the Main Control Board)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current process is during the opening of the jackpot. If the current process is during the opening, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S340-2. If the current process is not during the opening, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, if the special game timer counter stored in the main RAM 110b is 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval time has elapsed and proceeds to step S340-3. If the special symbol time counter stored in the main RAM 110b is not 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval time has not elapsed and ends the current jackpot game processing.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets the count value of the round number (R) counter stored in the main RAM 110b to 1.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a executes the large prize opening process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a reads the table number of the large prize opening opening control table from the reference of the first type special game control table for the large prize winning combination determined in step S330-7 (FIG. 23(a)) or the reference of the second type special game control table for the large prize winning combination determined in step S351-5 (FIG. 23(b)) described later, and determines the opening time of the first large prize winning combination 16 by referring to the first type special game control table for the large prize winning combination (FIG. 24(a)) or the second type special game control table for the large prize winning combination (FIG. 24(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the read table number and the current round number (R), and sets the determined opening time in the special game timer counter. In addition, the main CPU 110a sets the energization data for energizing the first large prize opening solenoid 16c in order to open the first large prize opening door 16b. Furthermore, the main CPU 110a sets the special power activation number (K) in the main RAM 110b to 1.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a executes a round start command transmission determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets a round start command corresponding to the current round number (R) in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the jackpot game process.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current process is in the ending stage of the big win. If the current process is in the ending stage, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S340-17. If the current process is not in the ending stage, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first large prize opening 16 is closed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the first large prize opening 16 is closed if no current supply data is set in the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 16c. If the first large prize opening 16 is closed, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S340-8. If the first large prize opening 16 is not closed, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time of the first large prize opening 16 has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the first large prize opening 16 has elapsed when the value of the special game timer counter is 0. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the first large prize opening 16 has elapsed, it advances the process to step S340-4. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the first large prize opening 16 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize game process.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening end condition of the first large prize opening 16 has been met. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition of the first large prize opening 16 has been met when the count value of the large prize opening ball entry number (C) counter in the main RAM 110b reaches a specified number (e.g., 9 balls), or when the special game timer counter is 0 (when the opening time has elapsed). If the opening end condition of the first large prize opening 16 has been met, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S340-10. If the opening end condition of the first large prize opening 16 has not been met, the main CPU 110a ends the jackpot game process.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a executes the closing process of the first large prize opening 16. Specifically, the main CPU 110a stops the energizing data that was energizing the first large prize opening solenoid 16c in order to close the first large prize opening opening door 16b. The main CPU 110a also refers to the large prize opening opening opening control table for the first type of jackpot (Figure 24(a)), determines the closing time of the first large prize opening 16 based on the current count value of the round number (R) counter, and sets the determined closing time in the special game timer counter.

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a executes a round data initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a resets the counter value of the number of balls entering the large prize slot (C) in the main RAM 110b. However, the main CPU 110a does not reset the counter value of the number of rounds (R) in the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the count value of the number of rounds (R) in the main RAM 110b is the maximum value. If the count value of the number of rounds (R) in the main RAM 110b is the maximum value, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S340-14. If the count value of the number of rounds (R) in the main RAM 110b is not the maximum value, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S340-13.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the count value of the number of rounds (R) in the main RAM 110b and ends the jackpot game processing.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a resets the count value of the number of rounds (R) in the main RAM 110b.

The main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command in step S340-15. Specifically, the main CPU 110a reads the ending designation command from the reference of the first type jackpot special game control table (FIG. 23(a)) determined in step S330-7 or the reference of the second type jackpot special game control table (FIG. 23(b)) determined in step S351-5 (described later), and sets the read ending designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a reads the ending time from the reference of the special game control table for the first type jackpot (FIG. 23(a)) determined in step S330-7 or the reference of the special game control table for the second type jackpot (FIG. 23(b)) determined in step S351-5 described below, and sets the read ending time in the special game timer counter.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the special game timer counter is 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed. If the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed, it advances the process to step S340-18. If the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has not elapsed, it ends the jackpot game process.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electricity processing data in the main RAM 110b to 5, and ends the jackpot game processing.

(Small win game processing of the main control board)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small win game processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current process is during the opening of a small win. If the current process is during the opening, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-2. If the current process is not during the opening, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-5.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the start interval has elapsed. Specifically, if the special game timer counter in the main RAM 110b is 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval has elapsed and proceeds to step S350-3. If the special game timer counter in the main RAM 110b is not 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval has not elapsed and ends the small win game processing.

The main CPU 110a executes the large prize opening process in step S350-3. Specifically, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the value of the special electric operation number (K) counter in the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a refers to the small prize large prize opening opening control table (FIG. 25(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c, determines the opening time based on the current value of the special electric operation number (K) counter, and sets the determined opening time in the special game timer counter in the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a then sets the energization data for energizing the second large prize opening solenoid 17c in order to open the second large prize opening opening door 17b.

Next, in step S350-4, the main CPU 110a executes a specific winning opening open/close control process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the small winning specific area open/close control table (FIG. 25(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c, determines the opening time from when the second large winning opening 17 is opened, the opening time of the sliding member 19C, and the closing time of the sliding member 19C, sets each of the determined times in a predetermined counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110b, and ends the small winning game process. The movement control of the sliding member 19C is executed based on the values of these set predetermined counters.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current process is during the ending of a small win. If the current process is during the ending, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-13. If the current process is not during the ending, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-6.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second large prize opening 17 is open or not. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the second large prize opening 17 is open when current supply data is set in the second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 17c. If the second large prize opening 17 is open, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-8. If the second large prize opening 17 is not open, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-7.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time of the second large prize opening 17 has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second large prize opening 17 has elapsed when the value of the special game timer counter is 0. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second large prize opening 17 has elapsed, it advances the process to step S350-3. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second large prize opening 17 has not elapsed, it ends the small prize game process.

In step S350-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening end condition for the second large winning opening 17 has been met. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition for the second large winning opening 17 has been met when the count value of the large winning opening ball entry number (C) counter in the main RAM 110b reaches a specified number (e.g., 9 balls), when the special game timer counter is 0 (when the opening time has elapsed), or when the specific area winning flag is set. When the opening end condition for the second large winning opening 17 has been met, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S350-9. When the opening end condition for the second large winning opening 17 has not been met, the main CPU 110a ends the small win game process.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a executes the closing process of the second large prize opening 17. Specifically, the main CPU 110a stops the energization data that was energizing the second large prize opening solenoid 17c in order to close the second large prize opening opening door 17b. The main CPU 110a also refers to the closing time in the small prize large prize opening opening control table stored in the main ROM 110c, determines the closing time of the second large prize opening 17 based on the current count value of the special power operation number (K) counter, and sets the determined closing time in the special game timer counter.

In step S350-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small win game has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the small win game has ended if the value of the special call operation number (K) counter in the main RAM 110b is the maximum value of 10, or the value of the number of balls entering the large winning port (C) counter has reached a specified number (e.g., 9 balls), or if the specific area winning flag is set. If the main CPU 110a determines that the small win game has ended, it proceeds to step S350-11. If the main CPU 110a determines that the small win game has not ended, it ends the small win game processing.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a executes a small win game end process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a resets the value of the special call activation number (K) counter and the value of the number of balls entered into the large winning slot (C) counter in the main RAM 110b.

Next, the main CPU 110a executes the ending process in step S350-12. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets a small win ending designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the special game timer counter in the main RAM 110b is 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed. If the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed, it advances the process to step S350-14. If the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has not elapsed, it ends the small win game process.

In step S350-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a specific area winning flag is set in the specific area winning flag storage area of the main RAM 110b. If the specific area winning flag is not set, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S350-15. If the specific area winning flag is set, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S351.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a sets a normal state flag in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b.

In step S350-16, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electricity processing data in the main RAM 110b to 0, and ends the small win game processing.

In step S351, the main CPU 110a executes the second type jackpot game transition process, and then ends the small jackpot game process. The second type jackpot game transition process will be described later.

As explained in the above flowchart, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during a small win game, the game state after the small win game ends will be the normal state. Therefore, even if a small win that triggers a second type of jackpot that transitions to a high base time-saving state is achieved, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during the small win game, not only will the second type of jackpot not be won, but after the small win game ends, the game will transition to the normal state, which is less favorable than the high base time-saving state.

However, it can be said that it is too cruel to the player to have to switch from the high base time-saving state to the normal state after the end of a small win game just because the game ball did not land in specific area 19B once during play in all small win games.

Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during a small win game in the high base time-saving state, the game may be set to transition to the normal state after the small win game ends only in the case of a specific small win.

Specifically, the game may be set to transition to the normal state only in the case of a small win that triggers a second type jackpot (second type 9R win J) that transitions to the normal state after completion by not having a game ball enter the specific area 19B. Also, even in the case of a small win that triggers a second type jackpot that transitions to a high base time-saving state after completion, the game may be set to transition to the normal state only in the case of a specific small win (for example, a small win that triggers a second type 2R win I).

In addition, the high base time-saving state may be switched to the normal state depending on the number of small wins in which the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during play. For example, the number of small wins in which the ball does not enter the specific area 19B may be counted, and the high base time-saving state may be switched to the normal state after the end of a small win game in which the count value reaches three.

Furthermore, depending on both the number of small wins in which the game ball did not enter the specific area 19B during play and the type of small win, the high base time-saving state may be transitioned to the normal state after the end of a small win game.

In addition, during the low base time-saving state, the opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.11 seconds, making it much more difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 15 compared to the high base time-saving state. However, depending on the strength and timing of the game ball's launch, it is very rare that the game ball may enter the second starting hole 15 even during the low base time-saving state, and it may even happen that the ball enters the second starting hole 15 and a small prize is won in a lottery based on the ball's entry.

In this situation, if the player deliberately stops firing the game ball during a small win game, thereby preventing the game ball from entering specific area 19B during the small win game, the game will transition from the low base time-saving state to the normal state, making it possible to intentionally transition to the normal state, which is more advantageous than the low base time-saving state.

Therefore, in the case of a small win occurring in the low base time-saving state, even if the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during the small win game, the low base time-saving state may be continued without transitioning to the normal state after the small win game ends.

(Second-type jackpot game transition processing of the main control board)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the second type jackpot game transition processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S351-1, the main CPU 110a clears the specific area winning flag storage area of the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S351-2, the main CPU 110a sets a normal state flag in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S351-3, the main CPU 110a resets the counter value of the low base time-saving count (B) counter and the counter value of the high base time-saving count (J) counter in the main RAM 110b. Next, in step S351-4, the main CPU 110a resets the counter value of the fluctuation count (L) counter in the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S351-5, the main CPU 110a executes a second type jackpot game preparation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines a reference destination for the second type jackpot special game control table (FIG. 23(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a reads the opening time from the determined reference destination, sets the determined opening time in the special game timer counter of the main RAM 110b, and sets the count value of the round number (R) counter of the main RAM 110b to 0. The main CPU 110a reads the opening designation command from the determined reference destination, and sets the read opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

Next, in step S351-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special power processing data in the main RAM 110b to 3, and ends the second type jackpot game transition process.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S360-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stopping symbol data stored in the stopping symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b and the game status information stored in the game status buffer.

Next, in step S360-2, the main CPU 110a executes a remaining number setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table (FIG. 21) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the loaded stopped symbol data and game status information, and determines the low base time reduction number (B) and high base time reduction number (J) at the end of the special game. The main CPU 110a sets the determined low base time reduction number (B) and high base time reduction number (J) in the low base time reduction number (B) counter and high base time reduction number (J) counter in the main RAM 110b, respectively.

Next, in step 360-3, the main CPU 110a executes a game status setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table (Figure 21) stored in the main ROM 110c based on the loaded stopped symbol data and game status information, and determines the game status at the end of the special game. The main CPU 110a sets the determined game status at the end of the special game in the game status flag storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S360-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state stored in the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 110b in the performance transmission data storage area.

Next, in step S360-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special power processing data in the main RAM 110b to 0, and ends the jackpot game end processing.

(Main control board general-purpose power control processing)
Figure 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal power control processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the GPIB processing data from the main RAM 110b. In step S402, the main CPU 110a references the branch destination address from the loaded GPIB processing data.

Then, the main CPU 110a executes the processing of the branch destination address referenced in step S402. Specifically, if the value of the loaded GPWD processing data is 0, the main CPU 110a advances the processing to step S410, and if the value of the loaded GPWD processing data is 1, the main CPU 110a advances the processing to step S420.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a executes normal symbol variation processing and ends the normal symbol/normal power control processing. In step S420, the main CPU 110a executes auxiliary game processing and ends the normal symbol/normal power control processing. Details of the normal symbol variation processing and auxiliary game processing will be described later.

(Main control board normal pattern change processing)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal pattern variation processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the normal symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S410-12. If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the counter value of the reserved number of normal symbols (G) counter in the main RAM 110b is 0. If the counter value of the reserved number of normal symbols (G) counter is 0, the main CPU 110a ends the normal symbol variation process. If the counter value of the reserved number of normal symbols (G) counter is not 0, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S410-3.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the counter value of the normal symbol reservation count (G) counter in the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-4, the main CPU 110a executes a shift process of the normal pattern determination information stored in the normal pattern memory area of the main RAM 110b. Specifically, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the normal pattern memory area shown in FIG. 35(c) to the previous memory section. Note that since the normal pattern determination castle stored in the first memory section is shifted to the 0th memory section, the normal pattern determination information previously stored in the 0th memory section is erased by this shift process.

Next, in step S410-5, the main CPU 110a executes a winning determination process for the normal symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the winning lottery table (FIG. 18(c)) for the normal symbol display device stored in the main ROM 110c, and in step S410-4, determines whether the normal symbol lottery has been won or lost based on the normal symbol random number value newly stored in the 0th memory section of the normal symbol memory area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-6, the main CPU 110a executes a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table (FIG. 33(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c, and determines the type of normal symbol to be stopped and the stop symbol data based on the current game state and the win/lose determination result performed in step S410-5, and sets the determined stop symbol data in the normal symbol data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S410-6 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-8, the main CPU 110a executes a process for determining the normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table (FIG. 33(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the win/loss determination result determined in step S410-5 and the current game state.

Next, in step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern determined in step S410-8 in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-10, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the normal symbols. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110b to cause the normal symbol display device 24 to display the variable normal symbols.

The main CPU 110a creates data for turning on and off the LED of the normal pattern display device 24 based on the normal pattern display data set in the above-mentioned predetermined area in the data generation process in the timer interrupt process of step S600 (FIG. 41) described above. Then, in the output control process in the timer interrupt process of step S700 (FIG. 41) described above, the main CPU 110a outputs the LED turning on and off data created in step S600 to the normal pattern display device 24, thereby starting the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 24.

Next, in step S410-11, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time. Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined in step S410-8 in the normal symbol time counter in the main RAM 110b, and ends the normal symbol fluctuation process.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal pattern change time has ended. Specifically, if the normal pattern time counter in the main RAM 110b is 0, the main CPU 110a determines that the normal pattern change time has ended. If the main CPU 110a determines that the normal pattern change time has ended, it advances the process to step S410-13. If the main CPU 110a determines that the normal pattern change time has not ended, it ends the normal pattern change process.

The main CPU 110a executes normal symbol variation stop processing in step S410-13. Specifically, it clears the display data set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110b in step S410-10 above. The main CPU 110a then sets display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step 410-6 above in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol determination command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110b.

Next, in step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped pattern data of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b is a winning combination. If the stopped pattern data of the normal pattern is a winning combination, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S410-16. If the stopped pattern data of the normal pattern is not a winning combination, the main CPU 110a ends the normal pattern variation process.

In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a executes a process for preparing to open the second starting hole 15. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game control table (FIG. 34(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c, and determines the table number of the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table based on the stopped pattern data of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table (FIG. 34(b)) stored in the main ROM 110c, and determines the reference destination of the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table based on the determined table number.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets the start interval time of the second start hole 15. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game control table (FIG. 34(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c, and determines the start interval time of the auxiliary game based on the stopped pattern data of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a sets the determined start interval time in the auxiliary game timer counter of the main RAM 110b. The main CPU 110a also sets the count value of the number of openings (S) in the main RAM 110b to 0.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol/normal power processing data in the main RAM 110b to 1, and ends the normal symbol variation processing.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is in the opening state. If the auxiliary game is in the opening state, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S420-2. If the auxiliary game is not in the opening state, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S420-4.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the opening time has elapsed when the count value of the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110b is 0. If the opening time has elapsed, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S420-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the main CPU 110a ends the auxiliary game process.

The main CPU 110a executes the opening process of the movable piece 15b in step S420-3. Specifically, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the count value of the number of openings (S) in the main RAM 110b, and sets energization data for energizing the start opening opening solenoid 15c to open the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15. The main CPU 110a reads the opening time from the reference of the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table (Figure 34 (b)) determined in step S410-16, and sets the opening time read in the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110b.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the auxiliary game is in the ending state. If the auxiliary game is in the ending state, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S420-12. If the auxiliary game is not in the ending state, the main CPU 110a advances the process to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is closed. Specifically, if the energization data for energizing the starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c has not been set, the main CPU 110a determines that the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is closed. If the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is closed, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S420-6. If the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is not closed, the main CPU 110a advances processing to step S420-7.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time of the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15 has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15 has elapsed when the value of the auxiliary game timer counter is 0. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15 has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process ends.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening end condition of the movable piece 15b of the second starting hole 15 has been met. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition of the movable piece 15b of the second starting hole 15 has been met when the count value of the second starting hole entry ball number (M) counter in the main RAM 110b reaches a specified number (e.g., 9 balls) or when the auxiliary game timer counter is 0 (the opening time has elapsed). If the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition of the movable piece 15b of the second starting hole 15 has been met, it proceeds to step S420-8. If the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition of the movable piece 15b of the second starting hole 15 has not been met, it ends the auxiliary game processing.

In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a executes a process for closing the movable piece 15b of the second start port 15. Specifically, the main CPU 110a stops the energization data for energizing the second start port opening/closing solenoid 15c. The main CPU 110a also reads the closing time from the reference of the auxiliary game movable piece opening/closing control table (Figure 34 (b)) determined in step S410-16, and sets the read closing time in the auxiliary game timer counter of the main RAM 110b.

In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not to end the auxiliary game. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines to end the auxiliary game when the count value of the number of openings (S) in the main RAM 110b reaches the maximum number, or when the count value (M) of the second starting port entry ball number (M) counter reaches a specified number (9 balls). If the main CPU 110a determines to end the auxiliary game, it proceeds to step S420-10. If the main CPU 110a determines not to end the auxiliary game, it ends the auxiliary game processing.

In step S420-10, the main CPU 110a executes auxiliary game termination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the count value of the opening count (S) counter and the count value of the second starting hole entry count (M) counter in the main RAM 110b.

The main CPU 110a sets the ending time in step S420-11. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game control table (FIG. 34(a)) stored in the main ROM 110c, determines the ending time of the auxiliary game based on the stopped pattern data of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern data storage area of the main RAM 110b, and sets the determined ending time in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time of the auxiliary game has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the ending time has elapsed if the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110b is 0. If the main CPU 110a determines that the ending time has elapsed, it advances the process to step S420-13. If the main CPU 110a determines that the ending time has not elapsed, it ends the auxiliary game process.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets the normal game processing data in the main RAM 110b to 0 and ends the auxiliary game processing.

(Main processing of the game ball count control unit)
Next, a description will be given of the control of the game ball count control unit 180 of the frame control board 160. FIG.

In step S701, the game ball count CPU 180a executes an initial setting process. Specifically, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not to back up data, and if it determines to back up data, it backs up predetermined data in the game ball count RAM 180b based on the backup information, and if it determines not to back up data, it clears the game ball count RAM 180b. Details of the initial setting information will be described later.

In step S702, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a power interruption detection signal, which is detected when a voltage drop of a predetermined level or less occurs, has been input from a power supply detection circuit (not shown) provided on the power supply board 175. If a power interruption detection signal has been input, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S703, and if a power interruption detection signal has not been input, the game ball count CPU 180a returns to step S702.

In step S703, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 ms) from a power supply detection circuit (not shown) provided on the power supply board 175. If the power interruption detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S704, and if the power interruption detection signal has not been continuously input for the predetermined period, the game ball count CPU 180a returns to step S702.

In step S704, the game ball count CPU 180a sets interrupt prohibition. Next, in step S705, the game ball count CPU 180a sends a launch prohibition command to the launch control unit 170 to prohibit the launch of game balls. Next, in step S706, the game ball count CPU 180a creates a checksum of the data in the usage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, and stores the created checksum in the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S707, the game ball count CPU 180a saves a backup flag. Next, in step S708, the game ball count CPU 180a prohibits access to the game ball count RAM 180b, and then performs an infinite loop to prepare for a power outage.

(Initial setting process of the game ball count control unit)
59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the initial setting process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S701-1, the game ball count CPU 180a performs initial settings of the CPU, such as initial settings of the built-in register. In step S701-2, the game ball count CPU 180a permits access to the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S701-3, the game ball number CPU 180a transmits a launch permission command to the launch control unit 170 to permit the launch of game balls.

In step S701-4, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the game ball count clear SW 180e has been pressed based on whether a detection signal has been input from the game ball count clear SW 180e. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game ball count clear SW 180e has been pressed, it advances processing to step S701-5, and if it determines that the game ball count clear SW 180e has not been pressed, it advances processing to step S701-6.

When the game ball count clear SW 180e is pressed, this refers to the frame control board RAM clear operation shown in (c-1) and (c-2) of FIG. 17, and the full RAM clear operation shown in (d-1) and (d-2) of FIG. 17. When the game ball count clear SW 180e is not pressed, this refers to the normal power-on operation shown in (a-1) and (a-2) of FIG. 17, and the main control board RAM clear operation shown in (b-1) and (b-2) of FIG. 17.

In step S701-5, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the entire area of the game ball count RAM 180b and proceeds to step S701-13.

In step S701-6, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a backup flag has been saved in the game ball count RAM 180b. If the backup flag has been saved, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S701-7, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S701-5.

In step S701-7, the game ball count CPU 180a calculates a checksum of the backup information in the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S701-8, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the checksum is normal.

Specifically, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the checksum calculated in step S701-7 matches the checksum saved in the game ball count RAM 180b, and if they match, determines that the checksum is normal, and if they do not match, determines that the checksum is abnormal. If the checksum is normal, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S701-9, and if the checksum is abnormal, proceeds to step S701-11.

In step S701-9, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the game ball count RAM 180b, and restores the backup information to the game ball count RAM 180b.

In step S701-10, the game ball count CPU 180a sends a game ball count restoration command associated with the restored game ball count to the main control board 110.

In step S701-11, the game ball count CPU 180a sends an impossible-to-recover command to the performance control board 120. When the performance control board 120 receives the impossible-to-recover command, it executes control to have the image display device 31 notify the player that recovery is impossible.

In step S701-12, the game ball count CPU 180a prohibits access to the game ball count RAM 180b, and thereafter performs standby processing by performing an infinite loop process.

In step S701-13, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the count button operation valid flag in the count button operation valid flag memory area of the game ball count RAM 180b.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs interrupt initial settings in step S701-14. This determines the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process of the game ball count control unit 180, which will be described later, and is set to 2 ms in this embodiment.

In step S701-15, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the interrupt permission and ends the initial setting process. With this interrupt permission setting, the game ball count control unit 180 executes timer interrupt processing every 2 ms thereafter.

(Timer interrupt processing of the game ball count control unit)
60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the game ball count control unit 180. When a clock pulse signal is generated, the game ball count CPU 180a saves the information stored in the register of the game ball count CPU 180a in a stack area in step S801.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs a timer update process in step S810. The timer update process is a process that updates the values of the gaming machine information notification waiting timer counter, the count notification waiting timer counter, and the game interruption determination timer counter. Details of the timer update process will be described later.

As explained using FIG. 15, the gaming machine information notification data is transmitted from the frame control board 160 to the card unit 9 every 300 ms, and the counting notification data is transmitted from the frame control board 160 to the card unit 9 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification data is transmitted. Therefore, the next gaming machine information notification data is transmitted 200 ms after the counting notification data is transmitted.

The gaming machine information notification waiting timer counter is a timer counter used to measure the time from when the above counting notification data is transmitted until the next gaming machine information notification data is transmitted (200 ms). The counting notification waiting timer counter is a timer counter used to measure the time from when the above gaming machine information notification data is transmitted until the counting notification data is transmitted 100 ms later. The game interruption determination timer counter is a timer counter used to determine whether or not the player is away from the seat. Details of the various controls using these timer counters will be described later.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs an error determination process in step S820. In the error determination process, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not there is a complete function activation error in the main control board 110, and whether or not there is a small ball detection error, iron ball detection error, or radio wave detection error in the frame control board 160. Details of the error determination process will be described later.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs a response process in step S830. In the response process, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a game machine information notification command has been received from the main control board 110, and if it determines that a game machine information notification command has been received, it sends a response command to the main control board 110. Details of the response process will be described later.

The gaming ball count CPU 180a performs gaming machine information notification processing in step S840. In the gaming machine information notification processing, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data for notifying the card unit 9 of the gaming status of the gaming machine 1, including the progress and stop status of the game, and transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9. Details of the gaming machine information notification processing will be described later.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs counting processing in step S850. In the counting processing, the game ball count CPU 180a determines the number of count balls to be transferred to the card unit 9 based on the input signal from the count button detection SW 82a, which is determined according to whether or not the count button 82 is operated and the manner of operation, and adds the determined count ball number to the count ball number counter of the game ball number RAM 180b.

In addition, in the counting process, the game ball count CPU 180a subtracts and adds to the game ball count counter, shot ball count counter, and total prize ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b based on the input signal from the shot ball sensor 2a, the input signal from the foul ball sensor 2b, and the prize ball designation command from the main control board 110. Details of the counting process will be described later.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs count notification processing in step S860. In the count notification processing, the game ball count CPU 180a generates count notification data and transmits the generated count notification data to the card unit 9. Details of the count notification processing will be described later.

The game ball count CPU 180a executes the loan control process in step S870. In the loan control process, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether loan notification data has been received from the card unit 9, and if it determines that loan notification data has been received, it increments and updates the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b, and transmits loan receipt result response data to the card unit 9.

The game ball count CPU 180a executes a game notification control process in step S880. In the game notification control process, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the player is seated or absent, determines the notification mode according to the seated or absent status, and transmits commands to the performance control board 120 for controlling the illumination of the game notification lamp 86 and the image displayed on the image display device 31 in the determined notification mode. The game notification control process will be described in detail later.

In step S881, the game ball count CPU 180a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S801 to the game ball count CPU 180a register and ends the timer interrupt process.

(Timer update process of the game ball count control unit)
61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer update process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S810-1, the game ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not the game machine information notification waiting flag is set in the game machine information notification waiting flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game machine information notification waiting flag is set, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S810-2, and if the game machine information notification waiting flag is not set, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S810-3.

In step S810-2, the gaming ball count CPU 180a updates the value of the gaming machine information notification waiting timer counter in the gaming ball count RAM 180b by subtracting 2 from the value. The gaming machine information notification waiting timer counter is subtracted by 2 because the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process in which the timer update process is performed is 2 ms, and the timer update process is performed every 2 ms.

In step S810-3, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not the count notification waiting flag is set in the count notification waiting flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the count notification waiting flag is set, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S810-4, and if the count notification waiting flag is not set, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S810-5.

In step S810-4, the game ball count CPU 180a updates the value of the count notification waiting timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b by subtracting 2 from the value. The count notification waiting timer counter is subtracted by 2 because the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process in which the timer update process is performed is 2 ms, and the timer update process is performed every 2 ms.

In step S810-5, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a game interruption determination flag is set in the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game interruption determination flag is set, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S810-6, and if the game interruption determination flag is not set, the timer update process ends.

In step S810-6, the game ball count CPU 180a subtracts 2 from the value of the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b, updates it, and ends the timer update process. The game interruption determination timer counter is subtracted by 2 because the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process in which the timer update process is performed is 2 ms, and the timer update process is performed every 2 ms.

(Error determination process of the game ball count control unit)
62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the error determination process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S820-1, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a game machine information notification command indicating a complete function activation error has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a game machine information notification command indicating a complete function activation error has been received, it proceeds to step S820-2, and if it determines that a game machine information notification command indicating a complete function activation error has not been received, it proceeds to step S820-3.

In step S820-2, the game ball count CPU 180a stores the error 1 occurrence information in the error 1 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, and proceeds to step S820-15.

In step S820-3, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the small ball sensor 81a. If a detection signal has been input from the small ball sensor 81a, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S820-4, and if a detection signal has not been input from the small ball sensor 81a, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S820-6.

In step S820-4, the game ball count CPU 180a stores the error 2 occurrence information in the error 2 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, sends an error system designation command indicating error 2 to the performance control board 120, and proceeds to step S820-5.

In step S820-5, the game ball count CPU 180a outputs the display data for error 2 to the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85, and proceeds to step S820-12. When the display data for error 2 is output, the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 change the display of the game ball count to "Err2," indicating that error 2 has occurred.

In step S820-6, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the iron ball sensor 81b. If a detection signal has been input from the iron ball sensor 81b, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S820-7, and if a detection signal has not been input from the iron ball sensor 81b, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S820-9.

In step S820-7, the game ball count CPU 180a stores the error 3 occurrence information in the error 3 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, sends an error system designation command indicating error 3 to the performance control board 120, and proceeds to step S820-8.

In step S820-8, the game ball count CPU 180a outputs the display data for Error 3 to the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85, and proceeds to step S820-12. When the display data for Error 3 is output, the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 change the display of the game ball count to "Err3," indicating that Error 3 has occurred.

In step S820-9, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the radio wave detection SW 19a. If a detection signal has been input from the radio wave detection SW 19a, the game ball count CPU 180a proceeds to step S820-10, and if a detection signal has not been input from the radio wave detection SW 19a, the error determination process ends.

In step S820-10, the game ball count CPU 180a stores the error 4 occurrence information in the error 4 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, sends an error system designation command indicating error 4 to the performance control board 120, and proceeds to step S820-11.

In step S820-11, the game ball count CPU 180a outputs the display data for error 4 to the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85, and proceeds to step S820-12. When the display data for error 4 is output, the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 change the display of the game ball count to "Err4," indicating that error 4 has occurred.

In step S820-12, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the game state flag for non-playable state 2 in the game state flag area of the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S820-13, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the count button operation valid flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b.

In step S820-14, the game ball count CPU 180a sets a count button operation invalid flag in the count button operation invalid flag memory area of the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S820-15, the game ball number CPU 180a sends a launch prohibition command to the launch control unit 170 and ends the error determination process. When the launch control unit 170 receives the launch prohibition command, it clears the launch permission flag memory area and prohibits the launch of game balls thereafter. Details of the control of the launch control unit 170 will be described later.

In this way, when the gaming ball count CPU 180a determines that a small ball detection error, an iron ball detection error, or a radio wave detection error has occurred, it clears the counting button operation valid flag (step S820-13) and sets the counting button operation invalid flag (step S820-14). Therefore, after detecting the occurrence of such an error, the gaming machine 1 invalidates the operation of the counting button 82, preventing the player from performing counting operations.

Figure 63 shows the change in the display mode of the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85. Figure 63 (a) shows the change in the display mode of the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 when a small ball detection error occurs, and the display mode changes from "1234", which indicates the number of game balls, to "Err2".

Figure 63 (b) shows the change in the display state of the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 when an iron ball detection error occurs, and the display state changes from "1234", which indicates the number of game balls, to "Err3".

Figure 63 (c) shows the change in the display state of the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 when a radio wave detection error occurs, and the display state changes from "1234", which indicates the game ball count, to "Err4".

Figure 63 (d) is a diagram showing the display state of the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 when a complete function activation error occurs, in which the display of "1234" indicating the game ball count is maintained, and no error code is displayed on the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85, such as a small ball detection error, iron ball detection error, or radio wave detection error.

(Response processing of the game ball count control unit)
64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the response process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S830-1, the game ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not a game machine information notification command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a judges that a game machine information notification command has been received, it advances the process to step S830-2, and if it judges that a game machine information notification command has not been received, it ends the response process.

In step S830-2, the game ball count CPU 180a updates the game status flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b based on the received game machine information notification command.

Specifically, if the gaming machine information notification command indicates a normal state, the gaming ball count CPU 180a sets a gaming state flag for the normal state in the gaming state flag storage area; if the gaming machine information notification command indicates a low base time-saving state, the gaming state flag for the low base time-saving state is set in the gaming state flag storage area; if the gaming machine information notification command indicates a high base time-saving state, the gaming state flag for the high base time-saving state is set in the gaming state flag storage area; and if the gaming machine information notification command indicates a complete function activation error, the gaming ball count CPU 180a sets a gaming state flag for the non-playable state 1 in the gaming state flag storage area.

In addition, the game states in the case of a small ball detection error, iron ball detection error, and radio wave detection error, which are non-playable state 2, are detected by the game ball count CPU 180a, and since this information is not included in the gaming machine information notification command received from the main control board 110, in step S830-2, the game state flag for non-playable state 2 is not set in the game state flag storage area.

In step S830-3, the game ball count CPU 180a sends a response command to the main control board 110 and ends the response process.

In the response process, as in the case where an error is detected in the error determination process shown in FIG. 62 (YES in step S820-3, YES in step S820-6, YES in step S820-9), the process equivalent to clearing the count button valid flag (step S820-13) or setting the count button invalid flag (step S820-14) is not performed. Therefore, in step S830-2, the game ball count control unit 180 validates the operation of the count button 82 even if the game state flag memory area is updated to any of the game states of the normal state, the low base time-saving state, the high base time-saving state, and the non-playable state 1.

(Gaming machine information notification process of the gaming ball count control unit)
65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification process of the gaming ball count control unit 180. In step S840-1, the gaming ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not the gaming machine information notification standby flag is set in the gaming machine information notification standby flag storage area of the gaming ball count RAM 180b. If the gaming ball count CPU 180a judges that the gaming machine information notification standby flag is set, it advances the process to step S840-2, and if it judges that the gaming machine information notification standby flag is not set, it ends the gaming machine information notification process.

In step S840-2, the gaming ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the gaming machine information notification wait timer counter in the gaming ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0. If the gaming ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the gaming machine information notification wait timer counter is greater than 0, it ends the gaming machine information notification process, and if it determines that the value of the gaming machine information notification wait timer counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), it proceeds to step S840-3.

The gaming machine information notification waiting timer counter is a timer counter used to measure the timing of transmitting gaming machine information notification data from the frame control board 160 to the card unit 9. As shown in FIG. 15, the transmission cycle of the gaming machine information notification data is 300 ms, and the transmission of the counting notification data is performed 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification data, so the next gaming machine information notification data is transmitted 200 ms after the transmission of the counting notification data.

The gaming machine information wait timer counter is set to a value of "200" in step S860-8 of the count notification process (FIG. 70) described below, and is updated by subtracting 2 in step S810-2 of the timer update process (FIG. 61) that is performed every 2 ms described above. Therefore, when it is determined in step S840-2 that the gaming machine information notification wait timer counter is not greater than 0 (is 0) ("NO" in step S840-2), this means that it has been determined that 200 ms have passed since the gaming machine information notification wait timer counter was set.

The gaming ball count CPU 180a executes a gaming machine information notification data transmission process in step S840-3. The gaming machine information notification data transmission process is a process for transmitting gaming machine information notification data indicating predetermined content from the gaming ball count control unit 180 to the card unit 9. Details of the gaming machine information notification data transmission process will be described later.

In step S840-4, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the game machine information notification waiting flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S840-5, the game ball count CPU 180a sets a count notification waiting flag in the count notification waiting flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S840-6, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the value of the count notification waiting timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b to "100" and ends the game machine information notification process.

(Gaming machine information data transmission process of the gaming ball count control unit)
66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine information data transmission process of the gaming ball count control unit 180. In step S840-3-1, the gaming ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not the normal gaming state is set in the gaming state flag storage area of the gaming ball count RAM 180b. If the gaming ball count CPU 180a judges that the normal gaming state is set, it advances the process to step S840-3-2, and if it judges that the normal gaming state is not set, it advances the process to step S840-3-3.

In step S840-3-2, the game ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that the gaming state is normal, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-7.

In this embodiment, when the normal game state is set in the game state flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b ("YES" in step S840-3-1), the game ball count CPU 180a always generates game machine information notification data indicating that the game state is normal (step S840-3-2). However, when the game state is a normal state transitioned from a high base time-saving state, game machine information notification data indicating that the game state is a high base time-saving state may be generated for a predetermined period (for example, until one or more fluctuations are completed, etc.) after transition to the normal state. In the above case, the game state indicated by the game machine information notification data transmitted from the game ball count control unit 180 to the card unit 9 becomes data indicating a high base time-saving state even if the actual game state is a normal state. Furthermore, if the condition for transitioning from the high base time-saving state is the opening of the second start hole, the predetermined period may be the period until the opening is completed, or the period until the variable display according to the number of winning balls due to the opening is completed.

The above-mentioned cases where the game state transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal state include, as described above, the end of a special game (e.g., a second type 9R win J) that transitions to the normal state after the special game ends, when a small win or a big win is not won before the 100 fluctuation display times, which is the upper limit number of times for the high base time-saving state, is displayed, and when the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during a small win that triggers a transition to a special game (e.g., a second type 9R win H) that transitions to the high base time-saving state after the special game ends.

In step S840-3-3, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not the game state of the low base time-saving state is set in the game state flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game state of the low base time-saving state is set, it advances processing to step S840-3-4, and if it determines that the game state of the low base time-saving state is not set, it advances processing to step S840-3-5.

In step S840-3-4, the game ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that the gaming state is in a low base time-saving state, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-7.

In step S840-3-5, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not the game state of the high base time-saving state is set in the game state flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game state of the high base time-saving state is set, it proceeds to step S840-3-6, and if it determines that the game state of the high base time-saving state is not set, it proceeds to step S840-3-7.

In step S840-3-6, the game ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that the gaming state is in a high base time-saving state, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-7.

In step S840-3-7, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not error 1 occurrence information is stored in the error 1 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that error 1 occurrence information is stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-8, and if it determines that error 1 occurrence information is not stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-9.

In step S840-3-8, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that error 1 has occurred, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-9.

In step S840-3-9, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not error 2 occurrence information is stored in the error 2 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that error 2 occurrence information is stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-10, and if it determines that error 2 occurrence information is not stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-11.

In step S840-3-10, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that error 2 has occurred, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-11.

In step S840-3-11, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not error 3 occurrence information is stored in the error 3 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that error 3 occurrence information is stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-12, and if it determines that error 3 occurrence information is not stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-13.

In step S840-3-12, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that error 3 has occurred, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-13.

In step S840-3-13, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not error 4 occurrence information is stored in the error 4 occurrence information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that error 4 occurrence information is stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-14, and if it determines that error 4 occurrence information is not stored, it proceeds to step S840-3-15.

In step S840-3-14, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data indicating that error 4 has occurred, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-15.

In step S840-3-15, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data including information on the number of gaming balls indicated by the count value stored in the gaming ball count counter of the gaming ball count RAM 180b, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-16.

In step S840-3-16, the game ball count CPU 180a generates game machine information notification data including information on the number of shot balls indicated by the count value stored in the shot ball count counter of the game ball count RAM 180b, transmits the generated game machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and proceeds to step S840-3-17.

In step S840-3-17, the gaming ball count CPU 180a generates gaming machine information notification data including information on the total number of winning balls indicated by the count value stored in the total winning ball count counter of the gaming ball count RAM 180b, transmits the generated gaming machine information notification data to the card unit 9, and ends the gaming machine information data transmission process.

(Counting process of the game ball number control unit)
67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the counting process of the game ball count control unit 180. The game ball count CPU 180a executes a game ball count transition condition establishment determination process in step S850-1. In the game ball count transition condition establishment determination process, the game ball count to be transferred from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 is determined based on whether the operation of the count button 82 is valid or not, whether the count button 82 is operated, and the operation mode of the count button 82 (short press, long press, etc.). The game ball count transition condition establishment determination process will be described in detail later.

In step S850-2, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the fired ball sensor 2a. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a detection signal has been input from the fired ball sensor 2a, it proceeds to step S850-3, and if it determines that a detection signal has not been input from the fired ball sensor 2a, it proceeds to step S850-5.

In step S850-3, the game ball count CPU 180a updates the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b by subtracting 1. In step S850-4, the game ball count CPU 180a updates the value of the shot ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b by adding 1.

In step S850-5, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the foul ball sensor 2b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a detection signal has been input from the foul ball sensor 2b, it proceeds to step S850-6, and if it determines that a detection signal has not been input from the fired ball sensor 2b, it proceeds to step S850-8.

In step S850-6, the game ball count CPU 180a adds 1 to the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b to update it. In step S850-7, the game ball count CPU 180a subtracts 1 from the value of the fired ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b to update it.

In step S850-8, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a prize ball count designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a prize ball count designation command has been received, it proceeds to step S850-9. If it determines that a prize ball count designation command has not been received, it proceeds to step S850-10. The prize ball count designation command is a command sent from the main control board 110 to the game ball count control unit 180 when a game ball enters the general winning port 12, the first start port 14, the second start port 15, the first large winning port 16, and the second large winning port 17, and is a command that includes information on the number of prize balls obtained.

In step S850-9, the game ball number CPU 180a adds the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number designation command to the game ball number counter in the game ball number RAM 180b to update it, and adds the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number designation command to the total prize ball number counter in the game ball number RAM 180b to update it.

In step S850-10, the game ball count CPU 180a sends a game ball count designation command indicating the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b to the main control board 110, and ends the counting process.

(Processing for determining whether the game ball number transition condition is satisfied by the game ball number control unit)
68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game ball number shift condition establishment determination process of the game ball number control unit 180. In step S850-1-1, the game ball number CPU 180a determines whether or not the count button operation invalid flag is set in the count button operation invalid flag storage area of the game ball number RAM 180b. If the game ball number CPU 180a determines that the count button operation invalid flag is set, it ends the game ball number shift condition establishment determination process, and if it determines that the count button operation invalid flag is not set, it proceeds to step S850-1-2.

In step S850-1-2, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not the count button operation valid flag is set in the count button operation valid flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the count button operation valid flag of the game ball count RAM 180b is set, it proceeds to step S850-1-3, and if it determines that the count button operation valid flag of the game ball count RAM 180b is not set, it ends the game ball count transition condition establishment determination process.

In step S850-1-3, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the count button 82 has been pressed briefly. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the count button 82 has been pressed briefly, it advances processing to step S850-1-5, and if it determines that the count button 82 has not been pressed briefly, it advances processing to step S850-1-4.

In step S850-1-4, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the count button 82 has been pressed and held. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the count button 82 has been pressed and held, it advances processing to step S850-1-7, and if it determines that the count button 82 has not been pressed and held, it ends the game ball count transition condition establishment determination processing. Details of the determination processing of whether the count button 82 has been pressed briefly and whether it has been pressed and held will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

In step S850-1-5, the game ball count CPU 180a subtracts 1 from the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b to update it. In step S850-1-6, the game ball count CPU 180a adds 1 to the value of the count ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b to update it, and ends the game ball count transition condition establishment determination process.

In step S850-1-7, the game ball count CPU 180a updates the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b by subtracting 250 from the value. In step S850-1-8, the game ball count CPU 180a updates the value of the count ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b by adding 250 to the value, and ends the game ball count transition condition establishment determination process.

(Determination of short press and long press of count button)
69(a) is a diagram showing the operation information storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. The operation information storage area is composed of a count button sampling signal storage area, a count button on-edge storage area, a count button off-edge storage area, and a count button on-off edge signal storage area. Each storage area is composed of a latest sampling storage section and a previous sampling storage section.

The game ball count CPU 180a executes an update process of the operation information storage area at each predetermined sampling period. In the update process of the operation information storage area, the game ball count CPU 180a writes the values of the latest sampling memory units of the count button sampling signal storage area, the count button on edge storage area, the count button off edge storage area, and the count button on/off edge signal storage area to the previous sampling memory area of each storage area.

Next, if a detection signal is input from the operation button detection SW82a, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the latest sampling memory area of the counting button sampling signal memory area to 1, and if a detection signal is not input from the operation button detection SW82a, it sets the latest sampling memory area of the counting button sampling signal memory area to 0.

Next, if the value of the previous sampling memory section of the counting button sampling signal memory area is 0 and the value of the latest sampling memory section is 1, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the latest sampling memory section of the counting button on edge memory area to 1.

Next, if the value of the previous sampling memory section of the counting button sampling signal memory area is 1 and the value of the latest sampling memory section is 0, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the latest sampling memory section of the counting button off edge memory area to 1.

Next, when the game ball count CPU 180a sets 1 to the latest sampling memory area of the counting button sampling signal memory area, it adds 1 to the value in the previous sampling memory section of the counting button on/off edge signal memory area and sets the value in the latest sampling memory section of the counting button on/off edge signal memory area.

In the above operation information storage area update process, the game ball count CPU 180a determines that it is a short press operation if the value set in the latest sampling memory section of the counting button on/off edge signal memory area at the sampling timing at that time is less than a predetermined value, and determines that it is a long press operation if it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. Figure 69 (b) is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area, and shows that the above-described operation information storage area update process is being performed.

(Counting notification process of the game ball number control unit)
70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the counting notification process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S860-1, the game ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not the counting notification standby flag is set in the counting notification standby flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball number CPU 180a judges that the counting notification standby flag is set, it advances the process to step S860-2, and if it judges that the counting notification standby flag is not set, it ends the counting notification process.

In step S860-2, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the count notification wait timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the count notification wait timer counter is greater than 0, it ends the count notification process, and if it determines that the value of the count notification wait timer counter is not greater than 0 (if it is 0), it proceeds to step S860-3.

As shown in FIG. 65, the count notification wait timer counter is set to "100" in step S840-6 immediately after the gaming machine information notification data is transmitted to the card unit 9 in the gaming machine information notification data transmission process in step S840-3 of the gaming machine information notification process. The count notification wait timer counter is decremented by 2 in the timer update process in the timer interrupt process that is performed every 2 ms. Therefore, the count notification wait timer counter is determined to be not greater than 0 (is 0) in step S860-2 of the count notification process when 100 ms have passed since the count notification wait timer counter was set to "100".

In step S860-3, the game ball count CPU 180a generates count notification data including information on the number of counted balls indicated by the value of the count ball counter in the game ball count RAM 180b, and transmits the generated count notification data to the card unit 9.

The counting notification data sent to the card unit 9 in step S860-3 will be either 1, 250, or 0. Specifically, if a valid long press of the counting button 82 is performed between the previous transmission of the counting notification data and the current transmission of the counting notification data, counting notification data indicating 250 as the number of counted balls is sent to the card unit 9. Also, if a valid short press of the counting button 82 is performed between the previous transmission of the counting notification data and the current transmission of the counting notification data, counting notification data indicating 1 as the number of counted balls is sent to the card unit 9.

If the operation of the counting button 82 is disabled between the time when the counting notification data was last sent and the time when it is sent this time, or if the counting button 82 is neither pressed long nor pressed briefly, counting notification data indicating that the number of counted balls is 0 is sent to the card unit 9.

As described above, when a small ball detection error, an iron ball detection error, or a radio wave detection error occurs and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 becomes the unplayable state 2, the gaming ball count control unit 180 displays an error code on the gaming ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 (steps S820-5, S820-8, and S820-11 in FIG. 62), the counting button operation valid flag is cleared (step S820-13), the counting button operation invalid flag is set (step S820-14), and the release of gaming balls is prohibited (step S820-15).

Therefore, when a small ball detection error, an iron ball detection error, or a radio wave detection error occurs, causing the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 to enter the unplayable state 2, and an error code is displayed on the gaming ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85, the gaming ball count control unit 180 restricts the transmission of count notification data, which is a transition signal for the number of gaming balls to 1 corresponding to a short press of the count button 82 or 250 corresponding to a long press of the count button 82, to the card unit 9 because the operation of the count button 82 is disabled and the condition for transition of the number of gaming balls is not met.

On the other hand, if an error occurs during activation of the complete function and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 becomes the non-playable state 1, the game ball count control unit 180 prohibits the release of game balls (step S820-15), but the display of the number of game balls on the game ball count display 84 and the frame control display 85 is maintained.

Therefore, when an error occurs during activation of the complete function, causing the gaming machine 1 to enter a non-playable state 1 and maintaining the display of the number of game balls on the game ball count display 84 and frame control display 85, the game ball count control unit 180 enables the transmission of count notification data to the card unit 9, which is a transition signal for the number of game balls, either 1 in response to a short press of the count button 82 or 250 in response to a long press of the count button 82, since operation of the count button 82 is valid and the condition for transition of the number of game balls can be met.

In addition, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 becomes the normal state, the low base time-saving state, or the high base time-saving state, the gaming ball count control unit 180 only updates the gaming state flag storage area of the gaming ball count RAM 180b (step S830-2) in the response process shown in FIG. 64, and does not perform the process equivalent to clearing the count button valid flag (step S820-13) or setting the count button invalid flag (step S820-14) in the error determination process. Therefore, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 becomes the normal state, the low base time-saving state, or the high base time-saving state, the gaming ball count control unit 180 enables the transmission of count notification data, which is a transition signal of the number of gaming balls of 1 corresponding to a short press of the count button 82 or 250 corresponding to a long press of the count button 82, to the card unit 9, since the operation of the count button 82 is valid and the transition condition of the number of gaming balls can be established.

In step S860-4, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the count ball counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0. If the value of the count ball counter is greater than 0, the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S860-5, and if the value of the count ball counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), the game ball count CPU 180a advances processing to step S860-6.

In step S860-5, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the value of the count ball counter in the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S860-6, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the count notification waiting flag area in the game ball count RAM 180b.

In step S860-7, the game ball count CPU 180a sets a game machine information notification waiting flag in the game machine information notification waiting flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S860-8, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the game machine information notification waiting timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b to "200" and ends the count notification process.

(Lending control process of the game ball count control unit)
71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the lending control process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S870-1, the game ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not lending notification data has been received from the card unit 9. If the game ball count CPU 180a judges that lending notification data has been received from the card unit 9, it proceeds to step S870-2, and if it judges that lending notification data has not been received from the card unit 9, it ends the lending control process.

In step S870-2, the game ball count CPU 180a adds the number of game balls indicated by the received loan notification data to the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b to update it. In step S870-3, the game ball count CPU 180a sends loan receipt result response data to the card unit 9 and ends the loan control process.

(Game notification control process of the game ball count control unit)
72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180. In step S880-1, the game ball count CPU 180a judges whether or not an away flag is set in the away flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If an away flag is set in the away flag storage area, the game ball count CPU 180a advances the process to step S880-2, and if an away flag is not set in the away flag storage area, the game ball count CPU 180a advances the process to step S880-4.

In step S880-2, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a start winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a start winning designation command has been received, it proceeds to step S880-3, and if it determines that a start winning designation command has not been received, it proceeds to step S880-16. As described above, the start winning designation command is a command sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120 and the frame control board 160 when a game ball wins at the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 (step S230-10 in FIG. 43, etc.).

In step S880-3, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the away flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b and proceeds to step S880-4.

In step S880-4, the game ball count CPU 180a performs seating notification mode determination processing. In the seating notification mode determination processing, the game ball count CPU 180a refers to a seating lamp light color determination table stored in the game ball number ROM 180c, determines the light color based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball number RAM 180b, and outputs light emission data corresponding to the determined light color to the game notification lamp 86.

In addition, in the seating notification mode determination process, the game ball count CPU 180a refers to the seating background color determination table stored in the game ball count ROM 180c, determines the background color for normal fluctuation based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b, and transmits a presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined background color to the presentation control board 120. The presentation control board 120 changes and displays the background color for normal fluctuation based on the presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the received background color. Details of the seating lamp light color determination table and the seating background color determination table will be described later.

In this embodiment, the game ball count CPU 180a uses the determined background color as the background color of the background image of the normal variation, but it may also be used as the color when displaying the image displayed behind the reserved image 41 (the so-called "reserved base"), the image of the edge of the image displayed on the LCD, or other specific images other than the background image.

In step S880-5, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a pattern determination command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a pattern determination command has been received, it advances processing to step S880-6, and if it determines that a pattern determination command has not been received, it advances processing to step S880-8.

In step S880-6, the game ball count CPU 180a sets a game interruption judgment flag in the game interruption judgment flag area of the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S880-7, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the value of the game interruption judgment timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b to "600000". "600000" is a value indicating 600000 ms (10 minutes). As described above, the game interruption judgment timer counter is a timer counter that is updated by subtracting 2 in step S810-6 of the timer update process within the timer interrupt process that is executed every 2 ms.

In step S880-8, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a game interruption determination flag is set in the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game interruption determination flag is set, it proceeds to step S880-9, and if it determines that the game interruption determination flag is not set, it ends the game notification control process.

In step S880-9, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a fluctuation start command has been received, it proceeds to step S880-11, and if it determines that a fluctuation start command has not been received, it proceeds to step S880-10.

In step S880-10, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not an opening designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that an opening designation command has been received, it proceeds to step S880-11, and if it determines that an opening designation command has not been received, it proceeds to step S880-13.

In step S880-11, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S880-12, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the game interruption determination timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b and ends the game notification control process.

In step S880-13, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game interruption determination timer counter is greater than 0, it ends the game notification control process, and if it determines that the value of the game interruption determination timer counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), it proceeds to step S880-14.

When the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game interruption determination timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0 ("YES" in step S880-13), this means that the state in which the next variable display does not start and the opening of the special game does not start has not continued for 600,000 ms (10 minutes) since the special symbol stopped. When the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game interruption determination timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b is not greater than 0 (is 0) ("NO" in step S880-13), this means that the state in which the next variable display does not start and the opening of the special game does not start has continued for 600,000 ms (10 minutes) since the special symbol stopped.

In step S880-14, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S880-15, the game ball count CPU 180a sets an absent flag in the absent flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, and ends the game notification control process.

In step S880-16, the game ball count CPU 180a performs an absence notification mode determination process and ends the game notification control process. In the absence notification mode determination process, the game ball count CPU 180a refers to the absence lamp light color determination table stored in the game ball number ROM 180c, determines the light color based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball number RAM 180b, and outputs light emission data corresponding to the determined light color to the game notification lamp 86.

In addition, in the absence notification mode determination process, the game ball count CPU 180a refers to the absence background color determination table stored in the game ball count ROM 180c, determines the background color for the customer waiting performance based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b, and transmits a performance pattern designation command corresponding to the determined background color to the performance control board 120. The performance control board 120 changes and displays the background color of the customer waiting performance based on the performance pattern designation command corresponding to the received background color. Details of the absence lamp light color determination table and the absence background color determination table will be described later.

As described above, when the display control of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 is being performed in the seating notification mode (step S880-4), if a symbol determination command is received, it can be assumed that the game has been suspended ("YES" in step S880-5), so the game suspension determination flag is set (step S880-6) and the game suspension determination timer counter is set to "600000" (step S880-7).

If neither the fluctuation start command nor the opening designation command is received for 10 minutes (600,000 ms), it is assumed that the player has left the seat ("NO" in step S880-9, "NO" in step S880-10, "NO" in step S880-13), and the game interruption determination flag is cleared (step S880-14) and the absent flag is set (step S880-15). Then, in the next game notification control process, if the start winning designation command is not received ("NO" in step S880-2), the absent notification mode determination process is performed, and the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 are changed from the seated notification mode to the absent notification mode (step S880-16).

After that, when the start winning command is received, it is assumed that the game has been resumed ("YES" in step S880-2), so the away flag is cleared (step S880-3), the seated notification mode determination process is performed (step S880-4), and the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 are changed from the away notification mode to the seated notification mode.

(Table for determining lamp color and background color when seated and away from desk)
73(a) is a diagram showing a seated lamp light color determination table. As described above, the seated lamp light color determination table is a table referred to in the seated notification mode determination process in step S880-4 of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 shown in FIG. 72, and is a table referred to when determining the light color of the game notification lamp 86 based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b.

The seated lamp light color determination table is a table that associates a range of game ball numbers with light colors, with "0" game ball number corresponding to "white," "1-9" game ball number corresponding to "flashing white," "10-999" game ball number corresponding to "blue," "1000-58999" game ball number corresponding to "green," and "59000 or more" game ball number corresponding to "red."

Figure 73 (b) is a diagram showing the seated background color determination table. As described above, the seated background color determination table is a table referenced in the seated notification mode determination process in step S880-4 of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 shown in Figure 72, and is a table referenced when determining the background color for normal fluctuations based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b.

The seated background color determination table is a table that associates a range of game ball numbers with background colors, with "blue" corresponding to game ball numbers in the range of "0-999," "green" corresponding to game ball numbers in the range of "1000-58999," and "red" corresponding to game ball numbers in the range of "59000 or more."

As a result of the above, when the player is seated, the game notification lamp 86 will "emit white light" if the number of game balls is "0", "blink white" if the number of game balls is "1-9", "emit blue light" if the number of game balls is "10-999", "emit green light" if the number of game balls is "1000-58999", and "emit red light" if the number of game balls is "59000 or more".

Therefore, when the player is seated and the number of playable game balls in the game ball count RAM 180b is nine or less, the game notification lamp 86 flashes white, informing the player that only a few game balls remain to be released. This makes it clear to the player that if the player wishes to continue playing, they will need to borrow new game balls.

When the number of playable game balls in the game ball number RAM 180b is nine or less, the game notification lamp 86 may be made to flash, or the color of the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 84 may be changed, in addition to or instead of flashing, to notify the player that only a few game balls are left to be released. Also, when the number of playable game balls in the game ball number RAM 180b is nine or less, an image or text may be displayed on the image display device 31 suggesting that a game ball lending operation is required.

In addition, if the number of playable game balls in the game ball count RAM 180b becomes 59,000 or more while the player is seated, the game notification lamp 86 will light up red, alerting the player and those around (such as hall employees) that the number of game balls that the gaming machine can store is about to be exceeded. In this way, since the upper limit of the game ball count counter is 60,000, the player can be prompted to operate the count button 82.

Furthermore, while seated, the game notification lamp 86 changes from blue to green when the number of playable game balls in the game ball count RAM 180b increases to 1000 or more, and changes from green to red when the number of playable game balls in the game ball count RAM 180b increases to 59000 or more, giving the player a sense of accomplishment that is not felt by simply increasing the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 84, and also providing the player with the gaming objective of changing the color of the light emitted by the game notification lamp 86 as the number of game balls increases. Also, when the game notification lamp 86 emits red light, it is possible to appeal to surrounding players and those passing behind the player that balls have been played, thereby enhancing the sense of superiority felt by the player.

Figure 73 (c) is a diagram showing the absent lamp light color determination table. As described above, the absent lamp light color determination table is a table referenced in the absent lamp light color determination process in step S880-16 of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 shown in Figure 72, and is a table referenced when determining the light color of the game notification lamp 86 based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b.

The Away Lamp Light Color Determination Table is a table that associates a range of game ball numbers with light colors, with "no light" corresponding to "0" game balls, "white flashing" corresponding to "1-9", "blue" corresponding to "10-999", "green" corresponding to "1000-58999", and "red" corresponding to "59000 or more".

Figure 73 (d) is a diagram showing the absence background color determination table. As described above, the absence background color determination table is a table referenced in the absence notification mode determination process in step S880-16 of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 shown in Figure 72, and is a table referenced when determining the background color of the customer waiting presentation based on the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b.

The away background color determination table is a table that associates a range of game ball numbers with background colors, with "gray" corresponding to a game ball number of "0," "blue" corresponding to a game ball number in the range of "1 to 999," "green" corresponding to a game ball number in the range of "1000 to 58999," and "red" corresponding to a game ball number in the range of "59000 or more."

As a result of the above, when the player is away from his/her seat, the game notification lamp 86 will not emit light if the number of game balls is "0", will "blink white" if the number of game balls is "1-9", will "emit blue" if the number of game balls is "10-999", will "emit green" if the number of game balls is "1000-58999", and will "emit red" if the number of game balls is "59000 or more".

The game notification lamp 86 does not emit light and remains off only when the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the player is away from the game machine, so that surrounding players, people passing by the game machine, and hall employees can determine that the game machine may be vacant.

In addition, the game notification lamp 86 flashes white when the number of game balls stored in the game ball count RAM 180b is between 1 and 9, allowing surrounding players, people passing by the game machine, and hall employees to determine that there are only a few game balls remaining when the player is away from his/her seat.

This makes it possible to alert nearby players, people passing by the gaming machine, and hall employees that a prank may be occurring, such as someone purposely ending a game with a small number of game balls remaining.

In this embodiment, the lighting state of the game notification lamp 86 when the number of game balls is "1 to 9" is the same "white flashing light" whether the player is seated or not, but by making the lighting state different for each, it is possible to clearly distinguish and notify "when the number of game balls is 1 to 9 while seated" and "when the number of game balls is 1 to 9 while away from the seat."

In addition, after a predetermined time (e.g., 15 minutes) has elapsed since the game notification lamp 86 started to flash white, the flashing cycle of the white flashing light may be changed, a specific sound may be output, or a specific image may be displayed on the image display device 31 to notify that a player has been away from the machine with 1 to 9 game balls remaining for a considerable period of time. In this way, the hall staff can know that the machine is away from the player but still has a small number of game balls remaining, making it easier for the staff to decide whether or not to open the game machine 1 as an empty machine.

Furthermore, the time that has elapsed since the game notification lamp 86 started to flash white may be displayed on the image display device 31 to clearly notify the player of the time that the number of game balls remaining is between 1 and 9 and the player is away from his/her seat.

By doing this, it is possible to clearly inform nearby players, people passing by the gaming machine, and hall employees that there is a possibility of mischief, such as a player intentionally ending play with a small number of game balls remaining.

In this embodiment, a background image according to the color determined by the Away Background Color Determination Table is displayed behind the waiting performance, but a semi-transparent image in a color determined by the Away Background Color Determination Table may be superimposed on the waiting performance, the text color of the word "Demo in progress" displayed during the waiting performance may be displayed in a color determined by the Away Background Color Determination Table, or other specific images displayed during the waiting performance may be displayed using the determined color.

(Main processing of launch control unit)
74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing of the launch control unit 170. The launch CPU 170a performs an initial setting process in step S610. Specifically, the launch CPU 170a performs initial setting of the CPU, such as initial setting of the built-in register, and then reads programs and data from the launch ROM 170c into the launch RAM 170b, and initializes various flags and various data stored in the launch RAM 170b.

The launch CPU 170a performs launch control processing in step S620. In the launch control processing, the launch CPU 170a performs control related to the launch of game balls, such as setting various flags stored in the launch RAM 170b based on commands received from the main control board 110 and the game ball count control unit 180, and driving the launch solenoid 4a and ball feed solenoid 4b based on input signals from the touch sensor 3a and the launch volume 3b. Details of the launch control processing will be described later.

In step S630, the launch CPU 170a determines whether or not a power-off command has been received from the main control board 110. If the launch CPU 170a has received a power-off command, it proceeds to step S640; if the launch CPU 170a has not received a power-off command, it returns to step S620.

In step S640, the launch CPU 170a prohibits access to the launch RAM 170b, performs an infinite loop process, and prepares for a power outage.

(Launch control process of the launch control unit)
75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the launch control process of the launch control unit 170. In step S620-1, the launch CPU 170a judges whether or not the launch permission flag is set in the launch permission flag storage area of the launch RAM 170b. If the launch CPU 170a judges that the launch permission flag is set, it advances the process to step S620-4, and if it judges that the launch permission flag is not set, it advances the process to step S620-2.

In step S620-2, the launch CPU 170a determines whether or not a launch permission command has been received from the main control board 110. If the launch CPU 170a determines that a launch permission command has been received from the main control board 110, it proceeds to step S620-3, and if it determines that a launch permission command has not been received from the main control board 110, it ends the launch control process.

In step S620-3, the launch CPU 170a sets the launch permission flag in the launch permission flag storage area of the launch RAM 170b and ends the launch control process.

In step S620-4, the firing CPU 170a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the touch sensor 3a. If the firing CPU 170a determines that a detection signal has been input from the touch sensor 3a, the process proceeds to step S620-5. If the firing CPU 170a determines that a detection signal has not been input from the touch sensor 3a, the process proceeds to step S620-6.

In step S620-5, the launch CPU 170a allows current to be applied to the ball-feeding solenoid 4b, and energizes the launch solenoid 4a so that the launch strength corresponds to the detection signal from the launch volume 3b, and proceeds to step S620-7. The energized ball-feeding solenoid 4b sends out game balls one by one toward the firing member directly connected to the launch solenoid, and the energized launch solenoid rotates the directly connected firing member to launch the game balls between the rails 5a and 5b.

In step S620-6, the launch CPU 170a stops powering the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b, and proceeds to step S620-7.

In step S620-7, the launch CPU 170a determines whether or not a launch prohibition command has been received from the main control board 110. If the launch CPU 170a determines that a launch prohibition command has been received from the main control board 110, it proceeds to step S620-8, and if it does not determine that a launch prohibition command has been received from the main control board 110, it ends the launch control process.

In step S620-8, the launch CPU 170a clears the launch permission flag storage area of the launch RAM 170b and ends the launch control process.

(Main processing of card unit control board)
76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing of the card unit control board 90. The unit CPU 910a performs an initial setting process in step S3010. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a performs initial setting of the CPU, such as initial setting of built-in registers, and then reads programs and data from the unit ROM 910c into the unit RAM 910b, and initializes various flags and various data stored in the unit RAM 910b.

In step S3020, the unit CPU 910a performs a banknote input detection process. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a updates the value in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b and performs processing related to the display of the amount display 93 in response to the input of a banknote 200 into the banknote insertion slot 91. The details of the banknote input detection process will be described later.

Next, in step S3030, the unit CPU 910a performs card input detection processing. Specifically, in response to the insertion of the card 201 into the card insertion slot 92, the unit CPU 170a updates the value of the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b and the value of the balls held information, and performs processing related to the display of the amount display 93 and the balls held display 94. Details of the card input detection processing will be described later.

Next, in step S3040, the unit CPU 910a performs a ball count update process. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a updates the value of the ball count information in the unit RAM 910b according to the value of the count notification data received from the game ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1, and performs processing related to the display of the ball count display 94. Details of the ball count update process will be described later.

Next, in step S3050, the unit CPU 910a performs lending processing. Specifically, in response to the operation of the lending button 98, the unit CPU 910a performs processing related to the generation of lending notification data and the transmission of the generated lending notification data to the gaming machine 1. Details of the lending processing will be described later.

Next, the unit CPU 910a performs a response confirmation process in step S3060. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a performs a process related to receiving loan receipt result response data from the gaming machine 1. Details of the response confirmation process will be described later.

Next, in step S3070, the unit CPU 910a performs a card ejection process. Specifically, when the eject button 99 is operated, the unit CPU 910a writes the amount information and ball count information stored in the unit RAM 910b to the card 201. Details of the card ejection process will be described later.

Next, in step S3080, the unit CPU 910a performs gaming machine information analysis processing, and returns the processing to step S3020. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is normal state, low base time-saving state, high base time-saving state, non-playable state 1, or non-playable state 2, based on the gaming machine information notification data received from the gaming ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1, and performs processing related to notifying the management center server (not shown) of the occurrence of fraud and returning the bills 200 and the cards 201 according to the determined gaming state. The gaming machine information analysis processing will be described in detail later.

(Banknote input detection process of the card unit control board 90)
77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the banknote input detection process of the card unit control board 90. The unit CPU 910a determines whether or not a banknote 200 has been inserted into the banknote insertion slot 91 in step S3020-1.

Specifically, when the banknote validator 91a detects the input of the banknote 200, the unit CPU 910a determines that the banknote 200 has been inserted into the banknote insertion port 91, and when the banknote validator 91a does not detect the input of the banknote 200, the unit CPU 910a determines that the banknote 200 has not been inserted into the banknote insertion port 91. When the unit CPU 910a determines that the banknote 200 has been inserted into the banknote insertion port 91, it advances the process to step S3020-2, and when it determines that the banknote 200 has not been inserted into the banknote insertion port 91, it ends the banknote input detection process.

In step S3020-2, the unit CPU 910a updates the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a adds the amount information identified by the banknote validator 91a to the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b, and sets the result in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

Next, in step 3020-3, the unit CPU 910a outputs display data to the amount display 93 to display the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b as amount information, and ends the banknote input detection process.

(Card input detection process on card unit control board)
78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the card input detection process of the card unit control board 90. The unit CPU 910a determines whether or not the card 201 has been inserted into the card insertion slot 92 in step S3030-1.

Specifically, if the card reader/writer 92a detects the input of the card 201, the unit CPU 910a determines that the card 201 has been inserted into the card insertion slot 92, and if the card reader/writer 92a does not detect the input of the card 201, the unit CPU 910a determines that the card 201 has not been inserted into the card insertion slot 92. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the card 201 has been inserted into the card insertion slot 92, it advances the process to step S3030-2, and if it determines that the card 201 has not been inserted into the card insertion slot 92, it ends the card input detection process.

In step S3020-2, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not amount information is stored on the card 201. If the unit CPU 910a determines that amount information is stored on the card 201, it proceeds to step S3030-3, and if it determines that amount information is not stored on the card 201 (amount information is 0 yen), it proceeds to step S3030-5.

In step S3030-3, the unit CPU 910a updates the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a adds the amount information stored in the card 201 to the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b, and sets the result in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

Next, in step 3030-4, the unit CPU 910a outputs display data to the amount display 93 to display the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b as amount information.

In step S3020-5, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not the ball count information is stored on the card 201. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the ball count information is stored on the card 201, it proceeds to step 3030-6, and if it determines that the ball count information is not stored on the card 201 (the ball count information is 0), it ends the card input detection process.

In step S3030-6, the unit CPU 910a updates the value stored in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a adds the ball count information stored on the card 201 to the value stored in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b, and sets the result in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

Next, in step 3030-7, the unit CPU 910a outputs display data to the ball count display 94 to display the value stored in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b as ball count information, and ends the card input detection process.

(Card unit control board ball count update process)
79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the owned ball count update process of the card unit control board 90. In step S3040-1, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not count notification data has been received from the gaming machine 1. If the unit CPU 910a determines that count notification data has been received, it proceeds to step S3040-2, and if it determines that count notification data has not been received, it ends the owned ball count update process.

In step S3040-2, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the number of counted balls indicated by the received count notification data is 0. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the number of counted balls is 0, it ends the ball count update process, and if it determines that the number of counted balls is not 0, it proceeds to step S3040-3.

As described above, when the number of counted balls indicated by the received counting notification data is 0 ("YES" in step 3040-2), this means that the operation of the counting button 82 has been invalidated or that a counting operation has not been performed by a short press or long press of the counting button 82. When the number of counted balls indicated by the received counting notification data is not 0 ("NO" in step 3040-2), this means that a counting operation has been performed by a short press or long press of the counting button 82.

In step S3040-3, the unit CPU 910a updates the value in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a adds the counted ball count indicated by the received count notification data to the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b and sets the result in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

Next, in step 3040-4, the unit CPU 910a outputs display data to the ball count display 94 to display the value stored in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b as ball count information, and ends the ball count update process.

(Card unit control board lending process)
80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the lending process of the card unit control board 90. In step S3050-1, the unit CPU 910a judges whether or not the lending receipt result response wait flag is set in the lending receipt result response wait flag area of the unit RAM 910b. If the unit CPU 910a judges that the lending receipt result response wait flag is set, it advances the process to step S3050-2, and if it judges that the lending receipt result response wait flag is not set, it advances the process to step S3050-3.

In step S3050-2, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the loan receipt result response wait timer counter in the unit RAM 910b is greater than 0. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the loan receipt result response wait timer counter is greater than 0, it ends the loan process, and if it determines that the loan receipt result response wait timer counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), it proceeds to step S3050-12.

The loan receipt result response waiting timer counter is a timer counter that is set in step S3050-12, which will be described later, and is set to "10" when the loan notification data is sent (step S3050-13). In addition, since the loan receipt result response waiting timer counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 every 1 ms, when the counter value becomes "0" (when "NO" is determined in step S3050-2), this indicates that 10 ms have passed since the loan notification data was sent.

In step S3050-3, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the loan button operation invalid flag is set in the loan button operation invalid flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the loan button operation invalid flag is set, it ends the loan process, and if it determines that the loan button operation invalid flag is not set, it proceeds to step S3050-4.

In step S3050-4, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the lending button detection SW 98a. If the unit CPU 910a determines that a detection signal has been input from the lending button detection SW 98a, it proceeds to step S3050-5, and if it determines that a detection signal has not been input from the lending button detection SW 98a, it ends the lending process.

In step S3050-5, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not counting notification data is being received from the game ball count control unit 180. If the unit CPU 910a determines that counting notification data is being received, it ends the lending process, and if it determines that counting notification data is not being received, it proceeds to step S3050-6.

As described above, when the unit CPU 910a receives counting notification data from the gaming machine 1 (when step S3050-5 is judged as "YES"), it does not lend out gaming balls regardless of whether the lending button operation invalid flag is set (when step S3050-3 is both "YES" and "NO"). For this reason, it can be said that the counting notification data sent when the counting button 82 is operated on the gaming machine 1 contains information that invalidates the operation of the lending button 98 on the card unit 9.

In step S3050-6, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the value in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b is greater than 0. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the value in the ball count information storage area is greater than 0, it proceeds to step S3050-10, and if it determines that the value in the ball count information storage area is not greater than 0 (is 0), it proceeds to step S3050-7.

In step S3050-7, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the value in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b is greater than 0. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the value in the amount information storage area is greater than 0, it proceeds to step S3050-8, and if it determines that the value in the amount information storage area is not greater than 0 (is 0), it ends the lending process.

In step S3050-8, the unit CPU 910a updates the value of the amount information storage area and the value of the number of balls information storage area of the unit RAM 910b. Specifically, if the value of the amount information storage area indicates 1000 yen or more, the unit CPU 910a updates the value of the amount information storage area by subtracting 1000 yen and updates the value of the number of balls information storage area by adding 250. The reason for adding 250 to the value of the number of balls information storage area and subtracting 1000 yen from the value of the amount information storage area is that this embodiment allows 250 game balls to be loaned for 1000 yen (each game ball can be loaned for 4 yen). In addition, if the loan of game balls is other than 4 yen each, the unit CPU 910a adds a value other than 250 to the value of the number of balls information storage area. For example, if 1,000 yen worth of gaming balls are loaned out at 1 yen each, the value added to the ball count information storage area will be 1,000.

In addition, if the value in the amount information storage area indicates a value less than 1,000 yen, the value obtained by dividing the value in the amount information storage area by 4 is added to the value in the ball count information storage area, and the value in the amount information storage area is subtracted by the amount used in the loan.

In step S3050-9, the unit CPU 910a changes the display of the amount display 93 and the number of balls held display 94. Specifically, the unit CPU 910a outputs output data to the amount display 93 for displaying information corresponding to the value in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b, and outputs output data to the number of balls held display 94 for displaying information corresponding to the value in the number of balls held information storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

The unit CPU 910a performs a process of determining the number of balls to be transferred in step S3050-10. Specifically, if the value in the retained balls display area of the unit RAM 910b is 250 or more, the unit CPU 910a determines the number of game balls to be transferred to the gaming machine 1 to be 250, and if the value in the retained balls display area of the unit RAM 910b is less than 250, the unit CPU 910a determines the value stored in the retained balls display area as the number of game balls to be transferred to the gaming machine 1.

In step S3050-11, the unit CPU 910a sets a loan receipt result response waiting flag in the loan receipt result response waiting flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b. In step S3050-12, the unit CPU 910a sets the value of the loan receipt result response waiting timer counter in the unit RAM 910b to "10".

In step S3050-13, the unit CPU 910a transmits count notification data indicating the number of game balls determined in step S3050-10 to the gaming machine 1, and ends the lending process.

In this embodiment, in the case of the lending operation from the card unit 9 to the gaming machine 1, whether the lending operation is performed by subtracting the amount information (step S3050-8, step S3050-9, step S3050-10) or by subtracting the number of balls held (step S3050-6: "YES", step S3050-10), the operation is triggered by the operation of the lending button 98. However, it is also possible to provide a button for the lending operation performed by subtracting the amount information and a button for the lending operation performed by subtracting the number of balls held, and to trigger the operation by these operations.

(Card unit control board response confirmation process)
81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the response confirmation process of the card unit control board 90. In step S3060-1, the unit CPU 910a judges whether or not loan receipt result response data has been received from the gaming machine 1. If the unit CPU 910a judges that the loan receipt result response data has been received, it proceeds to step S3060-2, and if it judges that the loan receipt result response data has not been received, it ends the response confirmation process.

In step S3060-2, the unit CPU 910a sets the value in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b minus the number of game balls determined in the transfer number determination process of the lending control process (step S3050-10 in FIG. 80).

In step S3060-3, the unit CPU 910a outputs output data to the ball count display 94 to display information corresponding to the value in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

In step S3060-4, the unit CPU 910a clears the loan receipt result response waiting timer counter in the unit RAM 910b. In step S3060-5, the unit CPU 910a clears the loan receipt result response waiting flag storage area in the unit RAM 910b and ends the response confirmation process.

(Card unit control board card ejection process)
82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the card ejection process of the card unit control board 90. In step S3070-1, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not the eject button operation invalid flag has been set in the eject button operation invalid flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the eject button operation invalid flag has been set, it ends the card ejection process, and if it determines that the eject button operation invalid flag has not been set, it proceeds to step S3070-2.

In step S3070-2, the unit CPU 910a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the eject button detection SW. If the unit CPU 910a determines that a detection signal has been input from the eject button detection SW, it proceeds to step S3070-3, and if it determines that a detection signal has not been input from the eject button detection SW, it ends the card ejection process.

In step S3070-3, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the value stored in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b is greater than 0. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the value stored in the amount information storage area is greater than 0, it advances processing to step S3070-4, and if the unit CPU 910a determines that the value stored in the amount information storage area is not greater than 0 (is 0), it advances processing to step S3070-5.

In step S3070-4, the unit CPU 910a stores the value in the amount information storage area of the unit RAM 910b on the card 201.

In step S3070-5, the unit CPU 910a determines whether the value in the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b is greater than 0. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the value in the ball count information storage area is greater than 0, it proceeds to step S3070-6, and if the unit CPU 910a determines that the value in the ball count information storage area is not greater than 0 (is 0), it proceeds to step S3070-7.

In step S3070-6, the unit CPU 910a stores the value of the ball count information storage area of the unit RAM 910b on the card 201.

In step S3070-7, the unit CPU 910a ejects the card 201 from the card insertion slot 92 and ends the card ejection process.

(Card unit control board gaming machine information analysis process)
83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine information analysis process of the card unit control board 90. In step S3080-1, the unit CPU 910a judges whether or not gaming machine information notification data has been received from the gaming machine 1. If the unit CPU 910a judges that gaming machine information notification data has been received, it proceeds to step S3080-2, and if it judges that gaming machine information notification data has not been received, it ends the gaming machine information analysis process.

In step S3080-2, the unit CPU 910a transmits the received gaming machine information notification data to the hall computer (not shown).

In this embodiment, when the gaming state indicated by the gaming machine information notification data received from the gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the unit CPU 910a transmits gaming machine information notification data indicating the normal state to the hall computer in step S3080-2. However, in the case of the normal state transitioned from the high base time-saving state, during a predetermined period after the transition to the normal state, gaming machine information notification data indicating the high base time-saving state, or predetermined data indicating the high base time-saving state instead of the gaming machine information notification data indicating the normal state, may be transmitted to the hall computer. The above-mentioned predetermined period may be, for example, the period until one variable display or a predetermined number of variable displays are completed. Furthermore, for example, if the condition for transitioning from the high base time-saving state is the opening of the second start port, it may be the period until the opening is completed, or the period until the variable display corresponding to the number of winnings due to the opening is completed.

In step S3080-3, the unit CPU 910a stores the gaming status indicated by the received gaming machine information notification data in the gaming status flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b, and updates the gaming machine status flag storage area.

Specifically, if the game state indicated by the gaming machine information notification data is a normal state, the unit CPU 910a sets the game state of the normal state in the game state flag memory area; if the game state is a low base time-saving state, the unit CPU 910a sets the game state of the low base time-saving state in the game state flag memory area; if the game state is a high base time-saving state, the unit CPU 910a sets the game state of the high base time-saving state in the game state flag memory area; if the game state is an unplayable state 1, the unit CPU 910a sets the game state of the unplayable state 1 in the game state flag memory area; and if the game state is an unplayable state 2, the unit CPU 910a sets the game state of the unplayable state 2 in the game state flag memory area.

In step S3080-4, the unit CPU 910a refers to the gaming machine information notification data received from the gaming machine 1 and determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred on the gaming machine 1. If the unit CPU 910a determines that a jackpot has occurred on the gaming machine 1, it ends the gaming machine information analysis process, and if it determines that a jackpot has not occurred on the gaming machine 1, it proceeds to step S3080-5.

In step S3080-5, the unit CPU 910a refers to the game status flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b and determines whether the gaming machine 1 has entered the normal state. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the gaming machine 1 has entered the normal state, it ends the gaming machine information analysis process, and if it determines that the gaming machine 1 has not entered the normal state, it proceeds to step S3080-6.

In step S3080-6, the unit CPU 910a refers to the game status flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b and determines whether the gaming machine 1 has entered a low base time-shortened state. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the gaming machine 1 has entered a low base time-shortened state, it ends the gaming machine information analysis process, and if it determines that the gaming machine 1 has not entered a low base time-shortened state, it proceeds to step S3080-7.

In step S3080-7, the unit CPU 910a refers to the game status flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b and determines whether the gaming machine 1 has entered a high base time-saving state. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the gaming machine 1 has entered a high base time-saving state, it ends the gaming machine information analysis process, and if it determines that the gaming machine 1 has not entered a high base time-saving state, it proceeds to step S3080-8.

In step S3080-8, the unit CPU 910a refers to the game status flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b and determines whether the gaming machine 1 has entered the unplayable state 1. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the gaming machine 1 has entered the unplayable state 1, it proceeds to step S3080-9, and if it determines that the gaming machine 1 has not entered the unplayable state 1, it proceeds to step S3080-10. As described above, the gaming machine 1 has entered the unplayable state 1 when a complete function activation error occurs in the gaming machine 1.

In step S3080-9, the unit CPU 910a sets the loan button operation invalid flag in the loan button operation invalid flag memory area of the unit RAM 910b and ends the gaming machine information analysis process.

In addition, in the card unit 9, the operation of the lending button 98 is disabled by setting the lending button operation disable flag in the lending button operation disable flag memory area of the unit RAM 910b, so that when a complete function activation error occurs, the operation of the lending button SW98 is disabled.

In step S3080-10, the unit CPU 910a refers to the game status flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b and determines whether the gaming machine 1 has entered the unplayable state 2. If the unit CPU 910a determines that the gaming machine 1 has entered the unplayable state 2, it proceeds to step S3080-11, and if it determines that the gaming machine 1 has not entered the unplayable state 2, it ends the gaming machine information analysis process. As described above, the gaming machine 1 has entered the unplayable state 2 when a small ball detection error, iron ball detection error, or radio wave detection error occurs in the gaming machine 1.

In step S3080-11, the unit CPU 910a sends the fraud notification data to the management center server or hall computer (not shown).

In step S3080-12, the unit CPU 910a sets a loan button operation invalid flag in the loan button operation invalid flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b.

When the lending button operation invalid flag is set in the lending button operation invalid flag memory area of the unit RAM 910b, the operation of the lending button 98 is invalidated in the card unit 9. Therefore, if a small ball detection error, iron ball detection error, or radio wave detection error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the operation of the lending button SW98 is invalidated.

In step S3080-13, the unit CPU 910a sets the eject button operation invalid flag in the eject button operation invalid flag memory area of the unit RAM 910b and ends the gaming machine information analysis process.

When the eject button operation invalid flag is set in the eject button operation invalid flag storage area of the unit RAM 910b, the operation of the eject button 99 is invalidated and the card 201 is not ejected. Therefore, if a small ball detection error, an iron ball detection error, or a radio wave detection error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the card 201 cannot be ejected from the card unit 9.

In this way, when the gaming machine information notification data sent from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, the gaming machine information analysis process is terminated without setting the loan button operation invalid flag (step S3080-9, step S3080-12) or the eject button operation invalid flag (step S3080-13). Therefore, it can be said that the gaming machine information notification data indicating the occurrence of a jackpot includes information that enables the operation of the loan button 98 and the eject button 99.

In addition, when the gaming machine information notification data sent from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 indicates that the normal state has been reached, the gaming machine information analysis process is terminated without setting the loan button operation invalid flag (step S3080-9, step S3080-12) or the eject button operation invalid flag (step S3080-13), so it can be said that the gaming machine information notification data indicating that the normal state has been reached includes information that enables the operation of the loan button 98 and the eject button 99.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine information notification data transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 indicates that a low base time-saving state has been entered, the gaming machine information analysis process is terminated without setting the lend button operation invalid flag (step S3080-9, step S3080-12) or the eject button operation invalid flag (step S3080-13), so that the gaming machine information notification data indicating that a low base time-saving state has been entered can be said to include information that enables the operation of the lend button 98 and the operation of the eject button 99.

Here, since the processing is the same when the normal state or the low base time-saving state is entered, among the gaming machine information notification data sent from the gaming ball count control unit 180 of the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9, the data indicating that the low base time-saving state and the normal state have been entered may be used as common notification data. Furthermore, this also includes setting "00H" as the common data.

In addition, when the gaming machine information notification data sent from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 indicates that a high base time-saving state has been reached, the gaming machine information analysis process is terminated without setting the lend button operation invalid flag (step S3080-9, step S3080-12) or the eject button operation invalid flag (step S3080-13), so it can be said that the gaming machine information notification data indicating that a high base time-saving state has been reached includes information that enables the operation of the lend button 98 and the operation of the eject button 99.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine information notification data sent from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 indicates that the unplayable state 1 has been reached, the loan button operation invalid flag is set (step S3080-9), but the eject button operation invalid flag is not set (step S3080-13), and the gaming machine information analysis process is terminated. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming machine information notification data indicating that the unplayable state 1 has been reached includes information for invalidating the loan button 98, but does not include information for invalidating the eject button 99.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine information notification data transmitted from the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 9 indicates that the unplayable state 2 has been reached, the lending button operation invalid flag is set (step S3080-12) and the eject button operation invalid flag is set (step S3080-13), so that the gaming machine information notification data indicating that the unplayable state 2 has been reached can be said to include information for disabling the lending button 98 and information for disabling the eject button 99.

(Main processing of the production control section)
84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing of the performance control unit 120m of the gaming machine 1. The main processing of the performance control unit 120m is started when a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 120a of the performance control unit 120m from the power supply board 175 due to a power start operation.

In step S1000, the sub-CPU 120a executes an initialization process. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 120a reads the main processing program and data from the sub-ROM 120c into the sub-RAM 120b, and initializes various flags and various data stored in the sub-RAM 120b.

The initialization process by the sub-CPU 120a is set to have a processing time that is extremely short compared to the initialization process by the main CPU 110a and the initialization process by the game ball count CPU 180a. Therefore, when the initialization process by the main CPU 110a and the initialization process by the game ball count CPU 180a are started, the performance control unit 120m is in a state in which it can receive commands from the main CPU 110a and the game ball count CPU 180a.

Next, in step S1100, the sub-CPU 120a executes an update process for the random number values for various effects stored in the sub-RAM 120b. The sub-CPU 120a then repeatedly executes the process of step S1100 until a predetermined interrupt process is executed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
85 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit 120m of the gaming machine 1. The sub-CPU 120a periodically executes the timer interrupt processing in response to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) by a reset clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) provided in the performance control unit 120m.

In step S1300, the sub-CPU 120a saves the information in the registers of the sub-CPU 120a to the stack area. Next, in step S1400, the sub-CPU 120a executes a process to update the count values of various timers stored in the sub-RAM 120b.

In step S1500, the sub-CPU 120a executes a command analysis process. The command analysis process is a process in which the sub-CPU 120a analyzes various commands sent from the main control board 110 and stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 120b. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

When the performance control unit 120m receives various commands from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process is generated by the performance control unit 120m, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 120b.

In step S1600, the sub-CPU 120a executes customer waiting performance control processing. Specifically, when the customer waiting performance standby flag is set in the customer waiting performance flag storage area, if the sub-CPU 120a determines that the count value of the customer waiting performance timer count in the sub-RAM 120b is 0, the sub-CPU 120a sets a customer waiting state execution flag in the customer waiting performance flag area of the sub-RAM 120b, and sets a performance pattern designation command for the customer waiting performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b. Note that the setting of the customer waiting performance standby flag and the setting of the customer waiting performance timer are processes performed in the customer waiting performance preparation process in step S1512 of the command analysis process described below.

When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive a performance pattern designation command for the customer waiting performance from the performance control unit 120m and the game ball count control unit 180, they perform processing to repeatedly execute the customer waiting performance for a predetermined period of time. The execution processing of the customer waiting performance and the standby processing of the customer waiting performance are terminated when the game state designation command, performance pattern designation command, and change pattern designation command are transmitted from the main CPU 110a.

The performance pattern designation commands for the customer waiting performance received by the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 are either set in the customer waiting performance control process in step S1600 of the performance control board 120, or set in the absence notification mode determination process in step S880-16 of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180.

In addition, the presentation pattern designation command set in the presentation control board 120 indicates the main presentation contents that make up the customer waiting presentation, whereas the presentation pattern designation command for the customer waiting presentation set in the game ball count control unit 180 indicates the contents regarding the background color of the customer waiting presentation.

In step S1700, the sub-CPU 120a executes effect input control processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a performs processing according to input signals from the effect button SW 35a, the cross key detection SW 39a, the cross key detection SW 39b, the cross key detection SW 39c, the cross key detection SW 39d, and the cross key detection SW 39e.

In step S1800, the sub-CPU 120a executes a data output process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b to the integrated control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step S1900, the sub-CPU 120a restores the information that was saved to the stack area in step S1300 to the registers of the sub-CPU 120a, and ends the timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
86, 87, and 88 are diagrams showing a flowchart of the command analysis process of the performance control unit 120m of the gaming machine 1.

In step S1501, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 120b to check whether there is a command received from the main control board 110. If there is a command received in the receive buffer, the sub-CPU 120a proceeds to step S1502. If there is no command received in the receive buffer, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1502, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a RAM clear command. If the command in the receive buffer is a RAM clear command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1503. If the command in the receive buffer is not a RAM clear command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1504.

In step S1503, the sub-CPU 120a executes the RAM clear notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a RAM clear notification instruction command for starting the RAM clear notification process in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the command analysis process.

The RAM clear notification command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b is sent to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150. When the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the RAM clear notification command, they execute processing to perform the RAM clear notification process.

In step S1504, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a power-on/power-restore command. If the command in the receive buffer is a power-on/power-restore command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1505. If the command in the receive buffer is not a power-on/power-restore command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1509.

In step S1505, the sub-CPU 120a executes the power-on notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a power-on notification instruction command to start the power-on notification process in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b.

The power ON notification command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b is sent to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150. When the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the power ON notification command, they execute processing to perform the power ON notification process.

In step S1506, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command corresponding to the power restoration designation command in the reception buffer is a command corresponding to a low base time-saving state. If the command corresponding to the power restoration designation command in the reception buffer is a command corresponding to a low base time-saving state, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1507. If the command corresponding to the power restoration designation command in the reception buffer is not a command corresponding to a low base time-saving state, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1507, the sub-CPU 120a sets a special background image setting flag in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. The special background image setting flag is a flag that is set to cause the image display device 31 to display a background image that differs from the actual game state immediately after the power is turned on or immediately after a jackpot ends.

Next, in step S1508, the sub-CPU 120a sets the count value of the special background fluctuation count (P) counter in the sub-RAM 120b to the initial value of 30, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1509, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is an error-related command. If the command in the receive buffer is an error-related command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1510. If the command in the receive buffer is not an error-related command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1511.

Error-related designation commands include a command indicating the occurrence of a complete function activation error resulting in unplayable state 1, a complete function activation error resulting in unplayable state 2, a small ball detection error designation command, an iron ball detection error designation command, a radio wave detection error designation command, and an unrecoverable command.

In step S1510, the sub-CPU 120a executes an error notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets an error notification command corresponding to the type of the received error-related designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the command analysis process.

The error notification command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b is sent to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150. When the overall control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the error notification command, they execute processing to perform the error notification process.

In step S1511, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the command in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1512. If the command in the receive buffer is not a customer waiting state designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1513.

In step S1512, the sub-CPU 120a executes customer waiting performance preparation processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a customer waiting performance standby flag in the customer waiting performance flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b, sets a standby time (e.g., 15 seconds) in the customer waiting performance timer count area of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the command analysis processing. Note that the customer waiting performance execution processing is performed in the customer waiting performance control processing of step S1600 described above.

In step S1513, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1514. If the command in the reception buffer is not a game state designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1516.

In step S1514, the sub-CPU 120a executes a game status setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines the current game status information from the game status designation command in the reception buffer, and stores the determined game status information in the game status information storage area of the sub-RAM 120b.

In step S1515, the sub-CPU 120a executes background image display control processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines the background image to be displayed based on the special background image setting flag stored in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b and the game status information stored in the game status information storage area of the sub-RAM 120b, and sets the presentation pattern designation command for the determined background image in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b. Details of the background image display control processing will be described later. After executing the background image display control processing, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis processing.

In step S1516, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command to specify the number of reserved special symbols. If the command in the reception buffer is a command to specify the number of reserved special symbols, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1517. If the command in the reception buffer is not a command to specify the number of reserved special symbols, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1518.

In step S1517, the sub-CPU 120a executes a reserved number update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a executes processes such as setting the reserved memory number corresponding to the received special pattern reserved number designation command to the reserved memory number counter in the sub-RAM 120b. After executing the reserved number update process, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command update process.

In step S1518, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a start winning designation command. If the command in the receive buffer is a start winning designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1519. If the command in the receive buffer is not a start winning designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1520.

The sub-CPU 120a executes a pre-reading effect determination process in step 1519. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect based on the received start winning designation command, the counter value of the reserved memory number counter in the sub-RAM 120b, and the game status information stored in the game status information storage area.

When executing a look-ahead performance, the sub-CPU 120a determines the type of look-ahead performance to be executed and the look-ahead performance scenario data, stores the determined look-ahead performance scenario data in the look-ahead performance scenario memory area of the sub-RAM 120b, and sets the counter value in the look-ahead performance counter memory area to an initial value according to the determined look-ahead performance scenario data. The sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command for starting the look-ahead performance in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 120b.

The look-ahead performance is made up of several types of look-ahead performance, such as a reserve change look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the first reserve image 41 and the second reserve image 42, a look-ahead zone performance that changes the background image over several variations, and a display of an effect indicating a look-ahead performance when the decorative pattern 36 temporarily stops. Note that by setting multiple look-ahead scenario data, multiple look-ahead performances can be executed individually or in parallel.

In step S1520, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a command to specify a performance pattern. If the command in the reception buffer is a command to specify a performance pattern, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1521. If the command in the reception buffer is not a command to specify a performance pattern, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1522.

In step S1521, the sub-CPU 120a executes a performance pattern determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines performance pattern data specifying the patterns to be stopped at the left pattern 36L, the center pattern 36C, the right pattern 36R, and the fourth pattern 36Z based on the received performance pattern designation command, sets a performance pattern designation command corresponding to the determined performance pattern data in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1522, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a time-saving count designation command. If the command in the receive buffer is a time-saving count designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1523. If the command in the receive buffer is not a time-saving count designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1524.

In step S1523, the sub-CPU 120a executes the time-saving count control process. Specifically, based on the received time-saving count designation command, the sub-CPU 120a sets the low base time-saving count (BK) and the high base time-saving count (JK) in the sub-RAM 120b to the time-saving count corresponding to the received time-saving count designation command, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1524, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command in the receive buffer is a variation pattern designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1525. If the command in the receive buffer is not a variation pattern designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1532.

In step S1525, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not pre-reading performance scenario data is stored in the pre-reading performance scenario storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. If pre-reading performance scenario data is stored, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1526. If pre-reading performance scenario data is not stored, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1527.

In step S1526, the sub-CPU 120a executes a look-ahead performance control process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command corresponding to the look-ahead performance to be executed in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 120b based on the look-ahead performance scenario data stored in the look-ahead performance scenario storage area of the sub-RAM 120b and the counter value of the look-ahead performance counter storage area. If the current change display is a change display of the look-ahead target, the sub-CPU 120a resets the look-ahead performance scenario storage area and the count value of the look-ahead performance counter storage area, and if the current change display is a change display earlier than the change display of the look-ahead target, the sub-CPU 120a subtracts 1 from the count value of the look-ahead performance counter storage area.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the look-ahead performance determination process of step S1519 and the look-ahead performance control process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the performance pattern designation command related to this look-ahead, they perform processing to execute the look-ahead performance according to the command using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In step S1527, the sub-CPU 120a executes a variable presentation pattern determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines a variable presentation pattern by referring to a variable presentation pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 120c based on the received variable presentation pattern designation command and the random number value for presentation stored in the sub-RAM 120b. The sub-CPU 120a sets a presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable presentation pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the variable performance pattern determination process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive the performance pattern designation command for the variable performance, they perform processing to execute the variable performance according to the command using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In step S1528, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the current game state is a high base time-saving state. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the game state information stored in the game state information storage area of the main RAM 120b is a high base time-saving state. If the current game state is a high base time-saving state, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process. If the current game state is not a high base time-saving state, the sub-CPU 120a proceeds to step S1529.

In step S1529, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. If the received variation pattern designation command corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1530. If the received variation pattern designation command does not correspond to the variation display of the first special symbol, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1530, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not the display is a variable display that stops a jackpot symbol that will result in a low base time-saving state after the special game ends. A jackpot that will result in a low base time-saving state after the jackpot ends is a first type 2R win C in the low base time-saving state and the high base time-saving state (Figure 21).

If the variable display indicates that a jackpot symbol that will result in a low base time-saving state after the special game ends stops, the sub-CPU 120a proceeds to step S1531. If the variable display indicates that a jackpot symbol that will result in a low base time-saving state after the special game ends does not stop, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1531, the sub-CPU 120a sets a special background image standby setting flag in the special background image standby setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1532, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a pattern determination command. If the command in the receive buffer is a pattern determination command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1533. If the command in the receive buffer is not a pattern determination command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1545.

In step S1533, the sub-CPU 120a executes a pattern determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command for stopping and displaying the decorative pattern 36 on the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the above pattern determination process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process of step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this performance pattern designation command, they perform processing to execute a performance related to the stopping of the decorative pattern 36 using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In step S1534, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the training mode setting flag in the sub-RAM 120b is set. If the training mode setting flag in the sub-RAM 120b is set, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1535. If the training mode setting flag in the sub-RAM 120b is not set, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1539.

The training mode setting flag is a flag that is set in S1527-7 in the variable presentation pattern determination process described later (FIG. 94). Specifically, the training mode setting flag is a true training mode setting flag (value 1) that is set when the training mode presentation is to start when the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 20 times remaining until the specified number of times, a false training mode setting flag (value 2) that is set when the training mode presentation is to start when the low base time-saving number of times (B) is 220 times remaining until the specified number of times, and a value of 0 that is set when neither of these are set. Thus, the sub-CPU 120a determines that the training mode setting flag is set when the training mode setting flag is set to a value of 1 or 2.

The training mode effect is an effect that suggests that the low base time-saving count (B) is approaching the set number of times in land mode, which indicates a low base time-saving state, and suggests that a transition to sea mode may be approaching.

The training mode effect starts when the low base time-saving count (B) is 20 times remaining until the specified count, and when it is 220 or 420 times remaining until the specified count, and continues to be executed for 20 fluctuation displays. In the final fluctuation of the training mode effect (the fluctuation effect on the 20th rotation from the start of the training mode effect), the training mode success effect or training mode failure effect is executed.

The training mode success effect is an effect that is always executed when the training mode effect is started when there are 20 times left until the low base time-saving number (B) reaches the specified number. Also, when the training mode effect is started when there are 220 or 420 times left until the low base time-saving number (B) reaches the specified number, either the training mode success effect or the training mode failure effect is executed depending on the value of the effect random number value.

After the training mode success presentation is performed, a presentation is presented to notify the player of a transition to sea mode, and after the training mode failure presentation is performed, a presentation is presented to notify the player of a continuation of land mode. After the training mode success presentation or training mode failure presentation is executed, a game presentation is executed in the presentation mode in which the transition was notified.

Therefore, if the land mode continues after the training mode failure effect is executed, the game state is confirmed as the low base time-saving state. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the sea mode after the training mode success effect, the game state will be either the normal state or the low base time-saving state. Details of the training mode will be described later.

In step S1535, the sub-CPU 120a subtracts 1 from the training mode change count (TM) in the sub-RAM 120b. In step S1536, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the training mode change count (TM) in the sub-RAM 120b is 1 or greater. If the training mode change count (TM) is 1 or greater, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1537. If the training mode change count (TM) is not 1 or greater, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1538.

In step S1537, the sub-CPU 120a sets the training mode continuation effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b an effect pattern designation command for displaying the remaining number of times in the training mode according to the training mode change count (TM) subtracted by 1 in step S1535, and for performing a chance-up effect whose execution is determined by a predetermined lottery based on the effect random number value, the training mode setting flag, and the remaining number of times in the training mode, and ends the command analysis process.

The chance-up effect that is executed during the training mode effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of the training mode success effect being executed, and is an effect that is more likely to be executed when the true training mode setting flag is set than when the false training mode setting flag is set.

In step S1538, the sub-CPU 120a executes a training mode notification display control process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a executes a training mode success notification display or a training mode failure notification display based on the value set in the training mode setting flag in the sub-RAM 120b and the random number value for display. Details of the training mode notification display control process will be described later.

In step S1539, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not a special background image setting flag is set in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. If the special background image setting flag is set, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1540. If the special background image setting flag is not set, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1540, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not to switch presentation modes. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets the special background image setting flag to stop the situation in which sea mode is being executed despite the low base state, and determines whether or not to switch presentation modes to land mode corresponding to the low base state.

More specifically, the sub-CPU 120a determines to switch presentation modes when the current game state is a low base time-saving state and the variable presentation pattern is variable presentation pattern 76 (when special miss c occurs), variable presentation pattern 83 (normal miss), or variable presentation pattern 90 (normal miss) as shown in FIG. 90. Details of the variable presentation patterns in the low base time-saving state when the presentation mode is sea mode will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 120a determines that the presentation mode should be changed, the process proceeds to step S1541; if the sub-CPU 120a determines that the presentation mode should not be changed, the process proceeds to step S1542.

In step S1541, the sub-CPU 120a sets the counter value of the special background fluctuation number (P) in the sub-RAM 120b to 0, and proceeds to step S1544.

In step S1542, the sub-CPU 120a subtracts 1 from the counter value of the special background change number (P) in the sub-RAM 120b. In step S1543, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the counter value of the special background change number (P) in the sub-RAM 120b is 1 or greater. If the special background change number (P) is 1 or greater, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process. If the special background change number (P) is not 1 or greater, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1544.

In step S1544, the sub-CPU 120a clears the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b and ends the command analysis process. As shown in the flowchart, the clearing of the special background image setting flag storage area in step S1544 may be performed via two routes, step S1543 or step S1541. Specifically, if the clearing of the special background image setting flag storage area in step S1544 goes via step S1541, it is performed based on the fluctuation pattern, and if the clearing goes via step S1543, it is performed based on the special background fluctuation count (P) becoming 0.

In step S1545, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is a special game system designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a special game system designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1546. If the command in the reception buffer is not a special game system designation command, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process. Note that special game system designation commands include a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round start command, and a jackpot ending designation command.

In step S1546, the sub-CPU 120a executes a special game performance control process. Specifically, in the special game performance control process, the sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b to cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the received special game system designation command. Details of the special game performance control process will be described later. After executing the special game performance control process, the sub-CPU 120a ends the command analysis process.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
89, 90, 91, and 92 are diagrams showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol variation of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation of the gaming machine 1.

The variation presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol variation consists of four types: a table referenced during the period when the variation display is performed in sea mode in the normal state (Figure 89), a table referenced during the period when the variation display is performed in sea mode in the low base time-saving state (Figure 90), a table referenced during the period when the variation display is performed in land mode (Figure 91), and a table referenced during the period when the variation display is performed in the high base time-saving state (Figure 92).

The variable presentation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation consists of two types: a table (Figure 93(a)) which is referenced during the period from the end of the jackpot until the 30th spin, and a table (Figure 93(b)) which is referenced during the period from the next variable display after the special miss a occurs and after the 31st spin after the end of the jackpot.

The variable performance pattern is the performance mode of the variable performance performed using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, and 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, and 340d.

First, we will explain each term listed in the presentation configuration of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 89 to 93.

"Normal fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation performance in which decorative patterns 36L and 36R stop at different types of patterns, and a reach state is not formed. "Shortened fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation performance in which decorative patterns 36L and 36R stop at different types of patterns, and a fluctuation display in which a reach state is not formed, and refers to a fluctuation performance with a shorter fluctuation time than normal fluctuation. "Normal reach" refers to a reach fluctuation performance that is performed in a state in which decorative patterns 36L and 36R temporarily stop at the same type of patterns.

"SP Reach A" and "SP Reach B" refer to reach variation effects that are performed in response to the variation of the first special symbol, have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and when won, result in a first type 10R hit. "SP Reach C" and "SP Reach D" refer to reach variation effects that are performed in response to the variation of the first special symbol, have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and when won, result in a first type 2R hit. "SP Reach C" and "SP Reach D" are also executed as part of the variation effects that result in a first type 10R hit (variation performance pattern 4, etc.), and in that case, a notification that a 10R hit has occurred during the jackpot (round promotion notification) is made.
"SP Reach G" and "SP Reach H" refer to reach change presentations that are mainly performed in response to the change in the second special symbol, have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and when won, result in an F for every 10R of the first type. "SP Reach I" and "SP Reach J" refer to reach change presentations that are mainly performed in response to the change in the second special symbol, have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and when won, result in a G for every 2R of the first type.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), "SP Reach G", "SP Reach H", "SP Reach I" and "SP Reach J" mainly occur in response to the variable display of the second special symbol as described above, but may also occur in response to the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base time-saving state.

In the high base time-saving state, the game ball rarely enters the first starting hole 14 because the game is played from the right, and the first special symbol is rarely displayed as a change, but the first special symbol may change in certain circumstances. Specifically, certain circumstances include when the game ball enters the first starting hole 14 by the player hitting from the left when the second special symbol is not changing in the high base time-saving state, or when there are reserved numbers for the first special symbol at the time the display of the change of the second special symbol has finished.

"Full rotation reach" is a reach variation effect that changes at a slow speed when the left pattern 36L, middle pattern 36C, and right pattern 36R of the same type are lined up. The full rotation reach is executed only when a first type 10R win D or a first type 10R win F is achieved, so it is an effect that notifies you that a first type 10R win has been confirmed and that a transition to a high base time-saving state will occur after the big win ends.

"Roulette effect" refers to an effect that occurs in response to the change in the first special symbol while sea mode is in progress, and is performed as part of a special miss or normal miss, and selects and displays one of the three results: "Land mode," "Sea mode," and "Underwater temple mode." "Chance effect" refers to an effect that occurs in response to the change in the second special symbol, and is executed after a normal reach miss effect, and indicates a small win or a normal miss. "Battle effect" refers to an effect that occurs in response to the change in the first special symbol while sea mode is in progress, and develops from a normal reach, and indicates a big win, mode transition, or mode continuation.

The "instant win effect" is an effect in which the left pattern 36L, right pattern 36R, and center pattern 36C stop in sequence at high speed to form a jackpot pattern, without any effect to hint at a jackpot through a reach effect. In the case of a first type jackpot (special pattern F, special pattern J), a combination of identical decorative patterns 36 is displayed. In the case of a second type jackpot (special pattern H, special pattern I, special pattern J), the same decorative pattern 36 is displayed on the left pattern 36L and right pattern 36R, and then a special pattern ("V hit") indicating a small jackpot win is displayed on the center pattern 36C.

Below is an explanation of the variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figures 89 to 92.

Figure 89 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol change in sea mode in the normal state. Figure 90 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol change in sea mode in the low base time-saving state. Figure 91 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol change in land mode. Figure 92 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol change in the high base time-saving state.

The variable presentation patterns for the first special symbol variation shown in Figures 89 and 90 are both tables that are referenced when the presentation mode is sea mode. The battle presentation that can only be performed in sea mode can be performed in either the normal state or the low base time-saving state, but the presentation patterns of the battle presentation that can be performed differ between the normal state and the low base time-saving state. The differences in the presentation patterns of the battle presentation in the normal state and the low base time-saving state are specifically explained below.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the battle effects in sea mode in the normal state, the possible patterns that can be executed are victory effects (variable effect patterns 14, 20, 23), draw effects (variable effect patterns 6, 10, 33, 41), and defeat effects (variable effect patterns 25, 27, 29).

In normal battle performance, the occurrence of the winning performance pattern described above notifies the transition to the high base time-saving state. Specifically, when variable performance pattern 14 is performed, a first type 2R win C occurs, and the transition to the high base time-saving state occurs after the big win ends. When variable performance pattern 20 is performed, a first type 10R win D occurs, and the transition to the high base time-saving state occurs after the big win ends. When variable performance pattern 23 is performed, a special miss a occurs, and the transition to the high base time-saving state occurs after the miss stops.

As explained in the game flow shown in Figure 11, the transition to the high base time-saving state due to the achievement of the first type 2R win C and special miss a occurs only in the normal state and not in the low base time-saving state. Therefore, the battle victory effects executed in variable presentation pattern 14 and variable presentation pattern 23 can be executed in the normal state but cannot be executed in the low base time-saving state.

Therefore, when a Type 1 2R win C occurs in the normal state, a battle victory effect (variable effect pattern 14) is performed, but when a Type 1 2R win C occurs in the low base time-saving state, the battle victory effect is not performed, and for example, an SP reach D is performed as shown in Figure 90 (variable effect pattern 63).

In addition, if special miss a occurs in the normal state, a battle victory effect is performed, but if special miss a occurs in the low base time-saving state as shown in Figure 90, a battle draw B effect is performed to notify the player that the effect mode will continue (variable effect pattern 72).

In addition, if special miss a occurs during a low base time-saving state, the battle draw effect (variable effect pattern 72) may not be performed, and an SP reach miss effect may be performed instead.

Also, as shown in Figures 26 and 27, the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern 31 in which a battle victory effect (fluctuation effect pattern 23) is performed when special miss a occurs in the normal state is T31 (50 seconds), and the fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern 64 in which a battle draw effect (fluctuation effect pattern 72) is performed when special miss a occurs in the low base time-saving state is T44 (35 seconds). Therefore, the execution time of the fluctuation effect when special miss a occurs in sea mode is longer in the normal state than in the low base time-saving state.

On the other hand, the transition to the high base time-saving state after the end of the first type 10R per D occurs both after the end of the first type 10R per D in the normal state and in the low base time-saving state. Therefore, in both the normal state and the low base time-saving state, the battle victory effect of "normal fluctuation → normal reach → battle effect (victory) → re-draw (7 symbols)" can be executed (fluctuation effect pattern 20, fluctuation effect pattern 69).

In the battle performance in the normal state, the occurrence of a losing performance pattern notifies the transition to the low base time-saving state. Specifically, when special miss b occurs, a battle defeat performance is executed by variable performance pattern 25, when special miss c occurs, a battle defeat performance is executed by variable performance pattern 27, when special miss d occurs, a battle defeat performance is executed by variable performance pattern 29, and after the defeat performance is executed, a transition to the ground mode is made.

As explained in the game flow shown in Figure 11, when special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d occur, the game state transitions to the low base time-saving state if the state before the special miss was normal, but if the state before the special miss was low base time-saving, the game state remains in the low base time-saving state.

Therefore, even if the battle defeat effect is executed in a low base time-saving state, the game state does not actually change, but since the game state after the special miss is a low base time-saving state, there is no contradiction between the content shown as a result of the battle effect and the current game state (variable effect pattern 76).

In variable presentation pattern 74 shown in FIG. 90 (when special miss b occurs), a battle draw presentation is executed to notify the continuation of sea mode. On the other hand, in variable presentation pattern 76 shown in FIG. 90 (when special miss c occurs), a battle defeat presentation is executed to notify the transition to land mode. Also, in variable presentation pattern 77 (when special miss d occurs), a normal miss is executed without a battle presentation, so sea mode continues as is.

The reason for continuing sea mode even when a special miss occurs is that, even though the base time-saving state is low, sea mode is executed in order to give the player a sense of expectation for the normal state, and so by continuing sea mode, the purpose is to maintain the player's expectation for the normal state. However, in variable presentation pattern 74 as well, a battle defeat presentation may be executed as in variable presentation pattern 76 to notify the player of the transition to land mode.

In addition, when special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d occur in the normal state, a battle defeat effect is always performed to notify the transition to land mode, but by performing a battle draw effect in the same way as in the low base time-saving state, sea mode may be continued even if the actual game state is in the low base time-saving state.

Next, the roulette effect can be performed in both normal and low base time-saving sea modes, but the effect patterns that can be performed in the normal and low base time-saving states are different. The differences in the roulette effect patterns in the normal and low base time-saving states are explained in detail below.

In the roulette presentation, if a special miss occurs, the pattern of numbers selected by the roulette indicates a transition to underwater temple mode, continuation of sea mode, or a transition to land mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, if special miss a occurs in the normal state, the roulette presentation indicates a transition to underwater temple mode (variable presentation pattern 22), and if special miss b, special miss c, or special miss d occurs in the normal state, the roulette presentation indicates a transition to land mode (variable presentation patterns 24, 26, 28).

As explained in the game flow shown in Figure 11, the transition to the high base time-saving state due to the establishment of special miss a does not occur in the low base time-saving state, but only in the normal state. Therefore, notification of the transition to the Underwater Temple mode when special miss a occurs is possible in the normal state, but is not possible in the low base time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in Figure 90, in the roulette presentation when special miss a occurs in the low base time-saving state, the transition to the Underwater Temple mode is not notified, but the continuation of the sea mode is notified (variable presentation pattern 71).

The reason why sea mode is notified of the continuation and a transition to land mode is given even in the low base time-saving state, is that, like the battle effect (variable effect pattern 72) when special miss a occurs in sea mode in the low base time-saving state, sea mode is executed to give the player a sense of expectation of the normal state even in the low base time-saving state, and so the purpose of executing the continuation effect of sea mode is to maintain the player's sense of expectation of remaining in the normal state. However, variable effect pattern 71 may be used to notify the player of the transition to land mode and notify that the current game state is in the low base time-saving state.

In addition, in the low base time-saving state, if special miss b is achieved, the roulette effect notifies the continuation of sea mode (variation effect pattern 73), and if special miss c is achieved, the roulette effect notifies the transition to land mode (variation effect pattern 75). Note that in the low base time-saving state, if special miss d is achieved, a normal miss occurs without a roulette effect or battle effect, so sea mode continues as is without any notification of a transition to land mode.

As shown in the game flow of FIG. 11, when special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d occur in the low base time-saving state, the game state is maintained in the low base time-saving state, so it is acceptable to notify the player of a transition to land mode in all cases. However, since sea mode is being executed to make the player expect to remain in the normal state, the transition to land mode is not notified in the roulette presentation when special miss b occurs, and in the normal miss when special miss d occurs, but the transition to land mode is only notified in the roulette presentation when special miss c occurs.

In addition, in the roulette presentation in the low base time-saving state, if special miss b, special miss c, or special miss d occurs, a notification of a transition to land mode will always be issued to notify the player that the current game state is in the low base time-saving state, or conversely, sea mode may always continue.

In addition, in the roulette presentation when special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d are achieved in the normal state, a transition to land mode is always announced, but by announcing the continuation of sea mode in the same way as special miss b in the low base time-saving state, sea mode may be continued even if the game state transitions to the low base time-saving state.

When a normal miss occurs in the low base time-saving state, the roulette presentation may notify a transition to land mode (variable presentation pattern 82, variable presentation pattern 90) or a continuation of sea mode (variable presentation pattern 81, variable presentation pattern 91) depending on the value of the presentation random number. Note that the roulette presentation executed in the normal miss in the low base time-saving state may always notify a continuation of sea mode, or may always notify a transition to land mode.

Figure 91 shows a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol variation in the ground mode. The ground mode is a presentation mode that can be executed only when the base time-saving state is low. As shown in the presentation configuration column in Figure 91, the ground mode does not have a variable presentation pattern that performs battle presentation and roulette presentation.

Figure 92 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol variation in the high base time-saving state. As described above, in the high base time-saving state, right-handed play is performed, so the game ball rarely enters the first starting hole 14, and there are few situations in which the first special symbol varies, so the variable presentation pattern determination table for the first special symbol variation in the high base time-saving state shown in Figure 92 is not referenced except in specific situations.

Note that specific situations include when, in a high base time-saving state, all display of the second special symbol changes is completed while reserved memory for the change of the first special symbol is stored, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 14 while no display of the second special symbol changes is being performed, etc.

When the first type jackpot is established as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol during high base time reduction state, variable effects such as normal reach, SP reach G, SP reach H, SP reach I, SP reach J, and full rotation reach (variable effect patterns 150 to 163) are executed. Note that these variable effects are the same as the effects selected in the variable effect pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation described later using Figure 93 (a).

In this embodiment, the SP reach executed in the first special symbol variation performance in the high base time-saving state and the SP reach executed in the second special symbol variation performance are common performances, but it is also possible to execute an SP reach that is exclusive to the first special symbol variation performance in the high base time-saving state.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol in the high base time-saving state is a special miss or a normal miss, a shortened variation is executed in both cases (variation presentation patterns 164 to 168). Therefore, the variation presentation when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the high base time-saving state is a special miss is different in that in the normal state and low base time-saving state, a reach presentation (including a battle presentation and a roulette presentation) is executed, whereas in the high base time-saving state, a non-reach presentation is executed.

Next, the variable presentation in the high base time-saving state will be explained using the variable presentation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 93. As explained in FIG. 29(a) and FIG. 29(b), the variable presentation pattern of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29(a) during the period from the end of the jackpot to the 30th spin, and the variable presentation pattern shown in FIG. 29(b) is referred to during the period from the next variable presentation after the special miss a is established and from the 31st spin onwards after the end of the jackpot.

As described above, the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 29(b) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 29(a).

Therefore, the period in which the next fluctuation display after the special miss a occurs and the period in which the fluctuation display is performed from the end of the jackpot to the 31st spin onwards is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the period in which the fluctuation display is performed from the end of the jackpot to the 30th spin.

The table shown in FIG. 93(a) is a variable presentation pattern determination table corresponding to a variable pattern determined by referring to the variable pattern determination table in FIG. 29(a). The variable presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 93(a) is a table that is referred to when the presentation mode is the Underwater Temple mode, and compared to the other two modes in the high base time-saving state (the jackpot preparation mode and the acceleration mode, which will be described later), variable presentations with relatively long durations for both miss and win variations are selected, and variable presentations that execute reach presentations such as SP reach presentations are also selected.

The table shown in FIG. 93(b) is a variable presentation pattern determination table corresponding to a variable pattern determined by referring to the variable pattern determination table in FIG. 29(b). The variable presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 93(b) is a table that is referred to when the presentation mode is the jackpot preparation mode or the acceleration mode, and for both miss and win variations, a variable presentation with a relatively short duration compared to the Underwater Temple mode is selected, and reach presentations such as SP reach presentations are not executed.

Thus, the presentation modes for the high base time-saving state include "jackpot preparation mode" (the high base time-saving state entered when special miss a occurs) and "acceleration mode" (the high base time-saving state from 31 spins after the end of the jackpot), in which relatively short fluctuation times are likely to be selected, and "undersea temple mode" (the high base time-saving state from 30 spins after the end of the jackpot), in which longer fluctuation times are likely to be selected than in these two presentation modes. Details of the presentation modes "jackpot preparation mode", "acceleration mode" and "undersea temple mode" will be described later.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variable presentation pattern determination process of the presentation control unit 120m of the gaming machine 1.

In step S1527-1, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the variation pattern specification command in the receive buffer.

In step S1527-2, the sub-CPU 120a selects a variable presentation pattern determination table. Specifically, if the MODE of the received variable pattern designation command is E6H (a variable pattern command for the first special symbol has been received), the sub-CPU 120a selects one of the four variable presentation pattern determination tables for the first special symbol variation (Figures 89, 90, 91, and 92) based on the current game state and presentation mode. Also, if the MODE of the received variable pattern designation command is E7H (a variable pattern command for the second special symbol variation has been received), the sub-CPU 120a selects the variable presentation pattern determination table for the second special symbol variation (Figure 93).

In step S1527-3, the sub-CPU 120a determines the variable presentation pattern by referring to the variable presentation pattern determination table selected in step S1527-2 based on the received variable presentation pattern designation command and the random number value for presentation stored in the sub-RAM 120b.

In step S1527-4, the sub-CPU 120a sets a presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variable presentation pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the variable presentation pattern determination process.

In step S1527-5, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the special background image setting flag in the sub-RAM 120b is set. If the special background image setting flag is set, the sub-CPU 120a ends the variable presentation pattern determination process. If the special background image setting flag is not set, the sub-CPU 120a proceeds to step S1527-6.

In step S1527-6, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the value of the low base time-saving count (BK) in the sub-RAM 120b is 20, 220, or 420. The low base time-saving count (BK) indicates the number of variable displays required to transition from the low base time-saving state to the normal state. If the value of the low base time-saving count (BK) is any of the above values, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1527-7. If the value of the low base time-saving count (BK) is not any of the above values, the sub-CPU 120a ends the variable presentation pattern determination process.

In step S1527-7, the sub-CPU 120a sets the training mode setting flag in the sub-RAM 120b. Specifically, if the low base time-saving count (BK) in the sub-RAM 120b is 20, the sub-CPU 120a sets the training mode setting flag to the true training mode setting flag (value 1). If the low base time-saving count (BK) in the sub-RAM 120b is 220 or 420, the sub-CPU 120a sets the training mode setting flag to the false training mode setting flag (value 2).

In step S1527-8, the sub-CPU 120a sets the training mode change count (TM) in the sub-RAM 120b to 20.

In step S1527-9, the sub-CPU 120a sets a presentation pattern designation command for performing a training mode start presentation in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the variable presentation pattern determination process.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the variable performance pattern determination process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process in step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this performance pattern designation command, they perform processing to execute a variable performance using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

(Training mode notification control process)
95 is a flow chart showing the training mode notification effect control process of the effect control unit 120m. In step S1538-1, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not the training mode setting flag of the sub-RAM 120b is set to the fake training mode setting flag (value 2). If the fake training mode setting flag is set, the sub-CPU 120a proceeds to step S1538-2, and if the fake training mode setting flag is not set, the sub-CPU 120a proceeds to step S1538-3.

In step S1538-2, the sub-CPU 120a acquires a random number value for effect (0 to 99), and if the acquired random number value for effect is a value below 50, the process proceeds to step S1538-3, and if the acquired random number value for effect is not a value below 50, the process proceeds to step S1538-5.

In step S1538-3, the sub-CPU 120a sets a special background image setting flag in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b.

In step S1538-4, the sub-CPU 120a sets a presentation pattern designation command for performing a training mode success notification presentation in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the training mode notification presentation control process.

In step S1538-5, the sub-CPU 120a sets a presentation pattern designation command for performing a training mode failure notification presentation in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the training mode notification presentation control process.

(Special game performance control process of the performance control unit)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game effect control process of the effect control unit 120m of the gaming machine 1.

In step S1547-1, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is an opening designation command. If the received command is an opening designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1547-2. If the received command is not an opening designation command, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1547-6.

In step S1547-2, the sub-CPU 120a executes an opening performance control process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command for executing an opening performance corresponding to the received opening designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the opening performance control process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process in step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this performance pattern designation command, they perform processing to execute an opening performance using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In step S1547-3, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not a special background image setting flag is set in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. If the special background image setting flag is set, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1547-4. If the special background image setting flag is not set, the sub-CPU 120a ends the special game performance control process.

In step S1547-4, the sub-CPU 120a clears the special background image setting flag storage area in the sub-RAM 120b. Next, in step S1547-5, the sub-CPU 120a resets the special background change number (P) in the sub-RAM 120b and ends the special game presentation control process.

In step S1547-6, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether the command in the receive buffer is a round start command. If the received command is a round start command, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1547-7. If the received command is not a round start command, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1547-8.

In step S1547-7, the sub-CPU 120a executes the round effect control process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command for executing the round effect corresponding to the received round start command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the special game effect control process.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the round performance control process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process in step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this performance pattern designation command, they perform processing to execute the round performance using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In step S1547-8, the sub-CPU 120a executes an ending performance control process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a sets a performance pattern designation command for executing an ending performance according to the received ending designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the ending performance control process is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process in step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this performance pattern designation command, they perform processing to execute the ending performance using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

In step S1547-9, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not a special background image standby setting flag is set in the special background image standby setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. If the special background image standby setting flag is set, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1547-10. If the special background image standby setting flag is not set, the sub-CPU 120a ends the special game presentation control process.

In step S1547-10, the sub-CPU 120a sets a special background image setting flag in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. Next, in step S1547-11, the sub-CPU 120a sets the special background change count (P) counter in the sub-RAM 120b to 30. Next, in step S1547-12, the sub-CPU 120a clears the special background image standby setting flag storage area in the sub-RAM 120b and ends the special game presentation control process.

(Background setting table)
Fig. 97 is a diagram showing the background setting table of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 97(a) is a diagram showing the normal background setting table, and Fig. 97(b) is a diagram showing the special background setting table, both of which are stored in the sub-ROM 120c.

The normal background setting table shown in FIG. 97(a) associates a game state, a mode name, and a background image. Specifically, in the normal state, the sea mode is associated with an underwater background image. In the low base time-saving state, the land mode is associated with a land background image. In the high base time-saving state, the underwater temple mode is associated with an underwater temple background image.

The special background setting table shown in FIG. 97(b) associates game states, mode names, and background images. Specifically, in the normal state and low base time-saving state, the ocean mode is associated with an underwater background image. In the high base time-saving state, the ocean temple mode is associated with an underwater temple background image.

As shown in Figures 97(a) and 97(b), the game state is always a low base time-saving state in land mode (when a land background image is displayed), and always a high base time-saving state in underwater temple mode (when an underwater temple background image is displayed). However, in sea mode (when an underwater background image is displayed), the game state can be either a normal state or a low base time-saving state.

As a result, in land mode, the player can determine that the current game state is a low-base time-saving state, and in underwater temple mode, the player can determine that the current game state is a high-base time-saving state. On the other hand, in sea mode under certain conditions, it becomes difficult for the player to accurately grasp the current game state.

For example, if a player wins C for 2R of the first kind, if the current game state is a low base time-saving state, the game will return to the low base time-saving state after the special game ends, but if the current game state is a normal state, the game will transition to a high base time-saving state after the special game ends. Therefore, when a player wins C for 2R of the first kind in sea mode, it may be difficult for the player to determine whether the game will enter a low base time-saving state or a high base time-saving state after the special game ends, which can heighten the player's expectations and further increase the interest of playing the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if the jackpot presentation for the first type 2R win B and the first type 2R win C is made the same, it will be difficult for the player to determine which jackpot they have won when they win the jackpot, which will further increase the player's sense of anticipation when they win the first type 2R win in sea mode.

(Background image display control process of the production control unit)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the background image display control process of the performance control unit 120m of the gaming machine 1.

In step S1515-1, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not a special game is being played. If a special game is being played, the sub-CPU 120a ends the background image display control process. If a special game is not being played, the sub-CPU 120a advances the process to step S1515-2.

In step S1515-2, the sub-CPU 120a determines whether or not a special background image setting flag is set in the special background image setting flag storage area of the sub-RAM 120b. If the special background image setting flag is set, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1515-4. If the special background image setting flag is not set, the sub-CPU 120a advances processing to step S1515-3.

In step S1515-3, the sub-CPU 120a executes the normal background image setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the normal background setting table (Figure 97 (a)) stored in the sub-ROM 120c based on the game status information in the game status information storage area of the sub-RAM 120b, and determines the background image to be displayed and the mode to be executed. The sub-CPU 120a sets the presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined background image and mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the background image setting process.

In this embodiment, when the special background image setting flag is not set in step S1515-2 and the game state information in the game state information storage area of the sub-RAM 120b is in the normal state, the sub-CPU 120a displays an underwater background image corresponding to the normal state by referring to the normal background setting table. However, when the high base time-saving state is followed by a transition to the normal state, a background image corresponding to the high base time-saving state may be displayed for a predetermined period of time after the transition to the normal state. The predetermined period may be one change period, multiple change periods, a period until a predetermined number of reserved memories of the first special symbol are consumed, or a period until a predetermined number of reserved memories of the second special symbol are consumed, etc. Furthermore, if the condition for transitioning from the high base time-saving state is the opening of the second start hole, the predetermined period may be a period until the opening ends, or a period until the variable display corresponding to the number of winnings due to the opening ends.

The above-mentioned cases of transition from the high base time-saving state to the normal state include, as described above, the end of a special game (e.g., a second type 9R win J) that transitions to the normal state after the special game ends, when no small win or big win is won before the 100 fluctuation displays, which is the upper limit number of times for the high base time-saving state, are displayed, and when the game ball does not enter the specific area 19B during a small win that triggers a transition to a special game (e.g., a second type 9R win H) that transitions to the high base time-saving state after the special game ends.

In addition, the background image corresponding to the high base time-saving state may be not only the underwater temple background image of the underwater temple mode shown in FIG. 97, but also the background image of the "preparing for jackpot" presentation mode described later using FIG. 108, or the background image of "in acceleration mode." In addition, when a "result display" is performed at the end of the time-saving state to show the total balls won during the winning streak and the history of jackpots, the "result display" can also be a background image corresponding to the high base time-saving state.

In step S1515-4, the sub-CPU 120a executes a special background image setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 120a refers to the special background setting table (Figure 97 (b)) stored in the sub-ROM 120c based on the game status information in the game status information storage area of the sub-RAM 120b, and determines the background image to be displayed and the mode to be executed. The sub-CPU 120a sets the presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined background image and mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120b, and ends the background image setting process.

The performance pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the normal background image setting and special background setting processes is sent to the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 by the output control process in step S1800. When the general control unit 141 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 receive this performance pattern designation command, they perform processing to display the specified background image and execute the mode performance using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the performance drive devices 330a, 330b, 330c, and the performance lighting devices 340a, 340b, 340c, 340d.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing of the central control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1.

The main processing of the overall control unit 141 begins when power is supplied to the performance control board 120 by the power supply board 175 and a system reset occurs in the overall CPU 141a.

In step S2000, the general CPU 141a prohibits all interrupt processes. Next, in step S2010, the general CPU 141a executes an initialization setting process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a executes initial settings of the general CPU 141a, initialization settings of the general RAM 141b, etc. Next, in step S2020, the general CPU 141a permits all interrupt processes.

The overall CPU 141a executes a volume adjustment process in step S2030. Specifically, when a detection signal is input from the key detection SW 39b (when the left SW of the cross key is operated), the overall CPU 141a subtracts 1 from the volume value stored in the overall RAM 141b if the volume value is not the lower limit value and stores the volume value. When a detection signal is input from the key detection SW 39d (when the right SW of the cross key is operated), the overall CPU 141a adds 1 to the volume value if the volume value stored in the overall RAM 141b is not the upper limit value and stores the volume value. When the overall CPU 141a performs an addition process or a subtraction process of the volume value, it sets a flag indicating that the volume has been changed in the volume change flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

The overall CPU 141a executes a light intensity adjustment process in step S2040. Specifically, when a detection signal is input from the key detection SW 39a (when the upper SW of the cross key is operated), the overall CPU 141a adds 1 to the light intensity value stored in the overall RAM 141b if the light intensity value is not the upper limit value and stores the result. When a detection signal is input from the key detection SW 39c (when the lower SW of the cross key is operated), the overall CPU 141a subtracts 1 from the light intensity value stored in the overall RAM 141b if the light intensity value is not the lower limit value and stores the result. When the overall CPU 141a performs an addition process or a subtraction process of the light intensity value, it sets a flag indicating that the light intensity has been changed in the light intensity change flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b.

In step S2050, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not a performance pattern designation command or a notification instruction command has been received. Specifically, if a performance pattern designation command or a notification instruction command is stored in the reception buffer of the general CPU 141b, the general CPU 141a determines that a performance pattern designation command or a notification instruction command has been received. If the general CPU 141a has received a performance pattern designation command or a notification instruction command, the general CPU 141a advances processing to step S2060. If the general CPU 141a has not received a performance pattern designation command or a notification instruction command, the general CPU 141a advances processing to step S2080.

In step S2060, the overall CPU 141a executes an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines an animation pattern that corresponds to the received performance pattern designation command or notification instruction command, and sets the determined animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141b.

In step S2070, the overall CPU 141a executes a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines a sound pattern that corresponds to the received performance pattern designation command or notification instruction command, and sets the determined sound pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141b.

In step S2080, the general CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag is set in the frame switching flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. If the frame switching flag is set, the general CPU 141a advances the process to step S2090. If the frame switching flag is not set, the general CPU 141a advances the process to step S2030. The frame switching flag is a flag that is set by the V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141, which will be described later.

In step S2090, the general CPU 141a clears the frame switch flag in the frame switch flag storage area of the general RAM 141b. Next, in step S2100, the general CPU 141a executes a scene update process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a refers to the scene switch counter and wait frame counter in the general RAM 141b, which are updated in the V blank interrupt process described below, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step S2060, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step S2070.

In step S2110, the overall CPU 141a executes drawing control processing. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a generates a display list in which drawing control commands are arranged from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address based on the drawing priority of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, and outputs the generated display list and drawing instruction command to the VDP 145.

The VDP 145 draws a display image in the drawing frame buffer based on the display list and drawing instruction command, and also performs processing to display the display image drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display device 31.

The general CPU 141a executes voice control processing in step S2120. Specifically, the general CPU 141a generates a voice control command from the sound data at the address updated in step S2070, and outputs the generated voice control command to the voice processor 144. In addition, if a volume change flag is set in the volume change flag storage area of the general RAM 141b, the general CPU 141a outputs a voice control command to change the volume according to the volume value of the general RAM 141b to the voice processor 144, and clears the volume change flag storage area.

The audio processor 144 performs processing to output special sounds, notification sounds, etc. to the audio output device 32 based on audio control commands.

The overall CPU 141a executes light intensity control processing in step S2130. Specifically, if a light intensity change flag is set in the light intensity change flag storage area of the overall RAM 141b, the overall CPU 141a outputs a light intensity control command to the lamp/drive control unit 150 to change the light intensity according to the light intensity value of the overall RAM 141b, clears the light intensity change flag storage area, and proceeds to step S2030.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the central control unit)
FIG. 100(a) is a diagram showing a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the central control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1.

In step S2200, the overall CPU 141a executes command reception processing. Specifically, when the overall CPU 141a receives a performance pattern designation command or a notification instruction command from the performance control unit 120m, it stores the received command in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 141b and ends the command reception interrupt processing.

(V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit)
Figure 100(b) is a diagram showing a flowchart of the V blank interrupt processing of the central control unit 141 of the gaming machine 1.

The VDP 145 outputs a V blank signal to the general CPU 141a every time one frame of image display is completed (every 1/30 seconds). When the general CPU 141a receives a V blank signal from the VDP 145, it executes the V blank interrupt process shown below.

The overall CPU 141a executes a counter update process in step S2300. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a adds 1 to the count values of the scene switch counter and wait frame counter in the overall RAM 141b used in the scene update process in step S2100 described above, and stores the count values.

In step S2310, the overall CPU 141a executes frame buffer switching processing. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a instructs the VDP 145 to switch between the drawing frame buffer and the display frame buffer.

In step S2320, the central CPU 141a sets the frame switching flag in the central RAM 141b and ends the V blank interrupt process.

(Example of a screen showing the changing effects)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a normal variable performance of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 101(a) is an example of a screen of a variable performance in a land mode, where a ground background image is displayed as a background image. FIG. 101(b) is an example of a screen of a variable performance in a sea mode, where an underwater background image is displayed as a background image. FIG. 101(c) is an example of a screen of a variable performance in an underwater temple mode, where an underwater temple background image is displayed as a background image. In either mode, the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, the right pattern 36R, and the fourth pattern 36Z are displayed on the image display device 31 in response to the variable display and stop display of the special pattern.

Figure 102 is a diagram showing an example of a screen for a normal reach presentation of the gaming machine 1. In the normal variable presentation, when the same type of decorative pattern is temporarily stopped on the left pattern 36L and the right pattern 36R, a normal reach presentation is executed. The normal reach presentation ends with the stopped display of the center pattern 36C, and when the three decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as the same type of decorative pattern, a jackpot is announced, and when the center pattern 36C, the left pattern 36L, and the right pattern 36R are stopped and displayed as different types of decorative patterns, a miss is announced.

Figure 103 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect screen on the gaming machine 1. As described above, if the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a special miss or some normal miss, a roulette effect is executed. The roulette effect is an effect that notifies the user of a change in the presentation mode or a continuation of the presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 103, the roulette effect is an effect that is executed after a miss is notified in the normal reach effect. At the start of the roulette effect, a "land" image notifying the land mode, an "ocean" image notifying the ocean mode, and a "temple" image notifying the underwater temple mode are displayed side by side. In the roulette effect, the illumination of the frame parts of the images then shifts in the order of "land" → "ocean" → "temple" → "land", and finally only the frame part of one image illuminates to display the final result of the roulette, notifying the transition to the next effect mode or the continuation of the effect mode.

In this embodiment, the roulette effect is executed via a normal reach miss after reaching tenpai, but it may also be executed from a high-speed fluctuation without going through reach tenpai, from a temporary stop of a specific non-reach result, or immediately after the fluctuation starts.

Figure 103(a) is a diagram showing an example screen in which the final result of a roulette presentation while in sea mode is the "sea" image, thereby notifying the user of sea mode. In the case of Figure 103(a), a text image saying "sea mode continues" is displayed at the start of the next changing display, thereby notifying the user that sea mode will continue. Note that the text image saying "sea mode continues" may be displayed immediately before the stopping of the changing display that has produced the roulette presentation, rather than at the start of the next changing display.

Figure 103(b) is a diagram showing an example of a screen in which the final result of a roulette presentation while in sea mode is the "ground" image, indicating the transition to ground mode. In the case of Figure 103(b), a text image saying "Entering ground mode" is displayed at the start of the next variable display, indicating that the mode has been switched to ground mode, and the background image changes to a ground background image corresponding to ground mode. Note that the text image saying "Entering ground mode" may be displayed immediately before the variable display that performed the roulette presentation stops, rather than at the start of the next variable display.

Figure 103(c) is a diagram showing an example of a screen in which the final result of the roulette presentation during the sea mode is the "temple" image, and the player is notified of the underwater temple mode. In the case of Figure 103(c), the text image "Entering Underwater Temple Mode" is displayed at the start of the next variable display, notifying the player that the mode has been switched to the underwater temple mode, and the background image changes to an underwater temple background image corresponding to the underwater temple mode. Note that since the underwater temple mode is a mode that is only executed in a high base time-saving state, a notification image (not shown) is also displayed to encourage the player to hit to the right when the mode is changed. Note that the text image "Entering Underwater Temple Mode" may be displayed not at the start of the next variable display, but immediately before the variable display that performed the roulette presentation stops.

When announcing a transition to the high base time-saving state via a roulette presentation, the presentation mode is switched to the Underwater Temple mode, but it may also be switched to the "jackpot preparation mode" described below. In that case, the roulette option to be selected may be the "jackpot preparation mode", or the transition to the jackpot preparation mode may be made after announcing a transition to the Underwater Temple mode via a roulette presentation.

Figure 104 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a variable performance that performs an SP reach performance on the gaming machine 1. The variable performance of the SP reach performance shown in Figure 104 is a variable performance pattern in which the SP reach performance is executed after passing through a normal variable performance and a normal reach performance.

The SP Reach performance has two development patterns: in a normal Reach performance, the middle symbol 36C temporarily stops at a losing symbol, then an image suggesting the SP Reach development is displayed and restarts, and in a development pattern, the middle symbol 36C changes from a high-speed rotation to a low-speed rotation, and then starts rotating at a high speed again.

When progressing to the SP reach performance, various chance-up performances can be executed. Chance-up performances include the falling motion of performance drive device 340a, the swinging motion of performance drive devices 340b and 340c, and the display of a chance-up image on the display area of image display device 31. Depending on the type of chance-up performance executed and the performance mode, it is possible to suggest to the player the likelihood of a big win, and various chance-up performances can be executed individually or in parallel.

When the SP reach performance is entered, the left pattern 36L is displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the display area of the image display device 31, and the right pattern 36R is displayed in a reduced size at the top right of the display area of the image display device 31. Meanwhile, the middle pattern 36C is enlarged and displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and after teasing whether it will stop at a winning pattern, it is temporarily stopped. When the middle pattern 36C temporarily stops, if the three decorative patterns are displayed as the same type of decorative pattern, a jackpot is announced, and if the middle pattern 36C, the left pattern 36L, and the right pattern 36R are displayed as different types of decorative patterns, a loss is announced.

(Example of a battle scene)
105 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a variable presentation for a battle presentation of the gaming machine 1. In the battle presentation, after a normal reach presentation is executed, the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 31, and two characters are displayed in the center of the liquid crystal, and a battle takes place between the two characters. The character on the left side is the player's character, and the character on the right side is the enemy's character, and the battle result is displayed after several offensive and defensive battles between the two characters.

The battle performance variation shown in FIG. 105(a) is a performance pattern in which the battle performance results in a draw A, a draw B, and a defeat, and is a variation performance in which the battle performance is executed through a normal variation performance and a normal reach performance.

When the game state is normal or low base time-saving, the draw A of the battle effect is executed by a variable effect when a first type 10R win A (variable effect pattern 6/variable effect pattern 55) or a first type 2R win B (variable effect pattern 10/variable effect pattern 59) is established (Figures 89 and 90). After the draw effect of the battle is executed, the big win pattern combination of the decorative pattern 36 is stopped and displayed.

When the game state is normal, the draw B of the battle effect is executed in the variable effect when a normal miss (variable effect pattern 33/variable effect pattern 41) is achieved (Fig. 89). Also, when the game state is low base time-saving state, the draw B of the battle effect is executed in the variable effect when a special miss a (variable effect pattern 72), a special miss b (variable effect pattern 74), and a normal miss (variable effect pattern 83, variable effect pattern 92) are achieved (Fig. 90).

The battle effect variation effect shown in FIG. 105(b) is an effect pattern in which a victory effect is produced by a battle effect, and the battle victory effect is produced after a normal variation effect and a normal reach effect, and the decorative pattern 36 is temporarily stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern combination, after which a re-draw effect is executed.

When the game state is normal or low base time-saving, the battle victory effect is executed in the variable effect when the first type 10R win D (variable effect pattern 20/variable effect pattern 69) is achieved (Figures 89 and 90). In addition, when the game state is normal, the battle victory effect is also executed in the variable effect when the first type 2R win C (variable effect pattern 14) or special miss a (variable effect pattern 23) is achieved (Figure 89).

All of the above battle victory effects have the same battle victory effect, but the results of the re-draw effect that is executed afterwards are different. Therefore, at the time the battle victory effect is executed, the player cannot know whether the first type 10R win D, the first type 2R win C, or the special miss a has been achieved, but can know that a transition to a high base time-saving state will occur afterwards. Details of the re-draw effect after each battle victory effect is executed will be described later using Figure 106.

In this embodiment, the battle performance is performed via a normal reach miss after a reach tenpai has been achieved, but it may also be performed without going through a reach tenpai, from a high-speed fluctuation, from a temporary stop of a specific non-reach result, or immediately after the fluctuation has started.

Figure 106 is a diagram showing details of the battle presentation of the gaming machine 1. Figure 106 (a) is an example of a screen of the battle victory presentation when the first type 2R win C is achieved in the normal state. Figure 106 (a-1) is an example of a screen at the start of the battle presentation, in which the reduced left pattern 36L and the right pattern 36R are displayed temporarily stopped in a reach tenpai state in the upper left of the liquid crystal, and the reduced middle pattern 36C is displayed variably between the left pattern 36L and the right pattern 36R. Figure 106 (a-2) is an example of a screen when the player's character wins the battle, in which the decorative pattern 36 is temporarily stopped with the big win pattern combination. After that, the decorative pattern 36 is changed at a low speed while maintaining the big win pattern combination (re-drawing presentation, Figure 106 (a-3)), and after the three patterns are temporarily stopped, it is announced that the first type 2R win will be executed (Figure 106 (a-4)).

Figure 106 (b) is an example screen of a battle victory effect when a first type 10R win D is achieved in the normal state or low base time-saving state. As with Figure 106 (a), after the battle starts (Figure 106 (b-1)), the battle victory effect is performed and the decorative pattern 36 temporarily stops at a jackpot pattern combination (Figure 106 (b-2)), a re-draw effect is performed (Figure 106 (b-3)), and after the 7 patterns are temporarily stopped, it is announced that a first type 10R win will be executed.

Figure 106 (c) is an example of a screen showing the battle victory effect when special miss a occurs in normal mode. As with Figures 106 (a) and 106 (b), a re-lottery effect is performed after the battle victory effect, and the reel stops provisionally when the 1 or 5 symbols line up, and a notification is given that the reel will move to the jackpot preparation mode. Details of the jackpot preparation mode will be described later.

The reason why the mode transitions to "jackpot preparation mode" after the special miss a occurs is to reduce disappointment that may occur to a player if the mode transition occurs without obtaining a jackpot despite the symbols lining up, and also because if the mode transitions to the high base time-saving mode, a small jackpot will be achieved, which has a probability of at least 1/12, before the high base time-saving count (J) reaches 100 and the mode transitions to the normal mode (see Figure 18 (b)), and the achievement of a small jackpot almost guarantees a second type jackpot. The image "preparing to jackpot" and other such images are displayed until a second type jackpot or a first type jackpot is won.

In Fig. 106(a), Fig. 106(b), and Fig. 106(c), the jackpot symbol combination of 2 symbols is provisionally stopped before the re-draw performance, but the 3 symbol (C for 2R of the first type in normal state), the 7 symbol (D for 10R of the first type), and the 1 and 5 symbols (a for special miss in normal state) may be provisionally stopped before the re-draw performance is performed. In that case, the re-draw performance performed after the battle victory performance will provisionally stop the jackpot symbol combination that is the same as the jackpot symbol combination before the re-draw performance is performed.

Also, at the end of the battle performance, a jackpot symbol combination of 3 symbols instead of 2 symbols may be temporarily stopped and then a jackpot symbol combination of 7 symbols may be temporarily stopped by a re-draw performance (when a D is achieved for a Type 1 10R win), or a jackpot symbol combination of 1 and 5 symbols may be temporarily stopped and a jackpot symbol combination of 3 symbols may be temporarily stopped by a re-draw performance (when a C is achieved for a Type 1 2R win in normal status).

However, re-draw performance patterns that lower the game profit are not executed, such as a jackpot symbol combination of 1, 3, and 5 temporarily stopping after the re-draw performance even though a jackpot symbol combination of 7 symbols is completed at the time of the battle victory performance, or a jackpot symbol combination of 1 and 5 temporarily stopping after the re-draw performance even though a jackpot symbol combination of 3 symbols is completed at the time of the battle victory performance. In other words, the re-draw performance is executed as a performance that notifies the same game profit as before the re-draw performance or a game profit higher than before the re-draw performance.

In this embodiment, after the transition to the high base time-saving state is indicated by a battle victory effect, the type of jackpot that has been achieved or the occurrence of a special miss a is notified by a re-draw effect of the jackpot pattern combination, but the type of jackpot that has been achieved or the occurrence of a special miss a may be notified by an effect that does not use decorative patterns, such as a new battle effect or a roulette effect.

In addition, after the special miss a occurs in the normal state, the mode is switched to the jackpot preparation mode, but it is also possible to notify the player of the transition to the Undersea Temple mode, which indicates that the high base time-saving state is in effect, just as after the end of the jackpot performance of the first type 2R D in the normal state.

Figure 106 (d) is an example screen of the battle draw A effect. After the battle effect starts (Figure 106 (d-1)), the battle draw effect is performed (Figure 106 (d-2)), and an effect is performed to tease whether or not a jackpot pattern will stop on the center pattern (Figure 106 (d-3)), after which the decorative pattern 36 provisionally stops on the jackpot pattern combination of even-numbered patterns (Figure 106 (d-4)).

In this embodiment, a re-draw effect is not performed after the temporary stop of the jackpot symbol combination in the battle draw A effect, but a re-draw effect may be performed in the same way as in the battle victory effect. In that case, if a first type 10R jackpot A or a first type 10R win B that transitions to the normal state after the end is achieved, the re-draw effect will not upgrade the jackpot symbol combination to 1, 5, 3, or 7, and the same jackpot symbol combination (for example, 2) as before the re-draw effect will be displayed again after the re-draw effect is executed.

In addition, when D for 10R of the first kind, C for 2R of the first kind in normal state, and a special miss in normal state are achieved, a pattern may be set in which a battle draw A effect is executed without executing a battle victory effect, and then a jackpot combination of 7 symbols (D for 10R of the first kind), 3 symbols (C for 2R of the first kind in normal state), and 1 and 5 symbols (special miss a in normal state) is provisionally displayed in the re-draw effect.

Figure 106 (e) is an example of a screen for the battle draw B effect, which is an example of a screen when a normal miss occurs. After the battle effect starts (Figure 106 (e-1)), a battle draw effect is performed (Figure 106 (e-2)), and an effect is performed in which it is suggested whether or not a jackpot pattern will stop on the symbols (Figure 106 (e-3)), after which the decorative symbols 36 temporarily stop in a reach miss combination, and a notification image is displayed indicating that sea mode will continue (Figure 106 (e-4)).

In addition, there is no pattern for displaying a winning symbol combination in a revival pattern after a missed reach symbol combination is displayed in a battle draw B effect. However, when a first type 10R win D is achieved, a winning symbol combination of 7 symbols may be temporarily displayed after a missed reach symbol combination is temporarily displayed in a battle draw B effect, or a winning symbol combination of 1, 3, and 5 symbols may be temporarily displayed after a battle win symbol pattern is temporarily displayed in a re-draw effect.

Similarly, when the first type 10R win A, the first type 2R win B, and the first type 2R win C are achieved, a battle draw effect B may be performed to provisionally display a missed reach combination, and then a battle victory effect pattern may be executed by a revival effect to provisionally display a jackpot symbol combination, or the jackpot symbol combination may be upgraded to a jackpot symbol combination that will increase the gaming profit by a subsequent re-draw effect.

Figure 106 (f) is an example of a screen showing a battle defeat effect. After the battle effect starts (Figure 106 (f-1)), the battle defeat effect is performed (Figure 106 (f-2)), the decorative patterns 36 temporarily stop in a missed reach combination, and a notification image is displayed indicating that the game will transition to ground mode (Figure 106 (f-3)).

As in the case of the battle draw performance B described above, when any of the first-class jackpots are achieved, a battle defeat performance may be performed to provisionally display a missed-reach combination, and then a battle victory performance pattern may be executed by a revival performance to provisionally display a jackpot symbol combination, or the jackpot symbol combination may be upgraded to one that results in a higher gaming profit by a subsequent re-draw performance.

Furthermore, when a normal miss occurs and sea mode is to continue, the battle draw B effect may not be executed, and the missed reach combination may be temporarily displayed as a battle defeat effect, after which a battle draw effect may be executed as a revival effect in which the player's character stands up, thereby announcing that sea mode will continue.

As described above, in the basic pattern of the battle effects, a battle victory effect notifies the player of a transition to a high base time-saving state, a battle draw effect notifies the player that the current sea mode will continue, and a battle defeat effect notifies the player of a transition to a low base time-saving state. Note that when a battle defeat effect is executed during sea mode in a low base time-saving state, the effect is as if the player is transitioning from the normal state to the low base time-saving state, but the actual game state is simply a continuation of the low base time-saving state.

(Promotion during big win)
Fig. 107 is a screen example showing a promotion effect during a jackpot on the gaming machine 1. Fig. 107(a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen of the ending of the jackpot effect of the first type 2R win B and the first type 2R win C. In the jackpot effect of the first type 2R win B and the first type 2R win C, when the 2R round game (Fig. 107(a-1)) ends, an ending screen is displayed (Fig. 107(a-2)).

Figure 107 (b) shows an example screen for the first type 10R win A and the first type 10R win D, in which the opening effect of the jackpot effect and the round effects for the 1st and 2nd rounds are performed in the same effect as the 2R jackpot effect, and then the round promotion is notified. Note that the effect notifying the round promotion is executed during the jackpot effect when the jackpot is notified by the SP reach effect C or SP reach effect D, which notifies that the 10R jackpot will become a 2R jackpot (when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed by the fluctuation effect patterns 4, 5, 18, 19, 53, 54, 67, 68).

In the 10R jackpot presentation that performs the above-mentioned round promotion presentation, when the 2R round play (Fig. 107(b-1)) ends, a pseudo ending screen is displayed (Fig. 107(b-2)), and then, as the 3R round play begins, an image is displayed informing the player that the jackpot play will continue and that a 10R jackpot has been reached (Fig. 107(b-3)).

Figure 107(c) is a diagram showing the ending screen during a jackpot when transitioning to sea mode after the jackpot ends. As shown in Figure 107(c), after the round play ends, an image indicating the end of the jackpot is displayed (Figure 107(c-1)), and then an image saying "FINAL CHANCE" is displayed (Figure 107(c-2)), followed by an image saying "Sorry" (Figure 107(c-3)), and transition to sea mode is announced (Figure 107(c-4)).

The ending effect shown in FIG. 107(c) is executed with the jackpot effect of the first type 10R per A and the first type 2R per B that occurs in the normal state or the low base time-saving state, and with the jackpot effect of the first type 2R per C that occurs in the low base time-saving state.

As mentioned above, the game state after the big win is the normal state in both the normal state and the low base time-saving state in the case of the first type 10R per A and the first type 2R per B. Also, the game state after the big win is the low base time-saving state in the case of the first type 2R per C in the low base time-saving state, but the special background image setting standby flag is set by steps S1530, S1531, etc. in the command analysis process (Figure 87), the special background image setting flag is set by step S1547-10 of the special game performance control process (Figure 96), and the background image of the sea mode is displayed after the big win is ended by the special background image setting process of step S1515-4 of the background image display control process (Figure 98).

Therefore, the game state in sea mode to which the transition occurs after the screen shown in FIG. 107 (c-4) is displayed is the normal state after the end of A per 10R of the first type and B per 2R of the first type, and the low base time-saving state after the end of C per 2R of the first type in the low base time-saving state.

Figure 107(d) is a diagram showing the ending screen during a jackpot when transitioning to the Underwater Temple mode after the jackpot ends. As shown in Figure 107(d), after the round of play ends, an image indicating the end of the jackpot is displayed (Figure 107(d-1)), and then an image saying "FINAL CHANCE" is displayed (Figure 107(d-2)), followed by an image saying "Success" (Figure 107(d-3)), and transition to the Underwater Temple mode is announced (Figure 107(d-4)).

The ending effect shown in FIG. 107(d) is executed at the end of a jackpot that transitions to the Underwater Temple mode after the jackpot ends. Specifically, this ending effect is executed in the case of D per 10R of the first type and C per 2R of the first type in the normal state, and D per 10R of the first type in the low base time-saving state.

The above ending effects are example screens that are executed only in the case of a jackpot effect that goes through a SP reach without going through a battle effect. However, they may also be executed in a jackpot effect that goes through a battle effect, such as when the first type 10R D is won, it is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot effect after the battle draw A effect.

(High base time-saving mode)
Fig. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in a presentation mode in a high base time-saving state of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 108(a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen when transitioning to the high base time-saving state via a jackpot. The jackpot presentation is carried out in the following order: an opening presentation (Fig. 108(a-1)) at the start of the jackpot, followed by a round presentation (Fig. 108(a-2)) during the jackpot, and an ending presentation (Fig. 108(a-3)) at the end of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 108(a-3), in the ending performance of a jackpot that transitions to a high base time-saving state after the jackpot ends, an image saying "NEXT Underwater Temple Mode!!" is displayed to notify the player that they will transition to the Underwater Temple Mode, which is a high base time-saving state, after the jackpot ends.

Figure 108 (a-4) is a diagram showing an example of the screen when the first display change starts after the end of a jackpot. When the first display change starts after the end of a jackpot, an image saying "Entering Underwater Temple Mode" is displayed, informing the user that they have transitioned to the Underwater Temple Mode, which is a high base time-saving state.

As mentioned above, when the game state is in the high base time-saving state, right-hand play is required, and therefore when the game state is in the high base time-saving state, an operation instruction image is displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right (Fig. 108 (a-4)). Note that the operation instruction image is displayed large in the center of the display area immediately after the big win ends, but after a predetermined time has passed, it is displayed small in a corner of the display area (Fig. 108 (a-5)). The reason for switching the display to a small operation instruction image after the predetermined time has passed is that if the large operation instruction image is displayed for a long period of time, it becomes difficult to see the game presentation.

In this embodiment, the operation instruction image encouraging right-hitting is switched from a large image to a small image, but after the large operation instruction image and the small operation instruction image are displayed, the large operation instruction image may be erased and only the small operation instruction image may continue to be displayed.

The operation instruction image shown in FIG. 108 (a-5) is generally always displayed during the variable display during the high base time-saving state, but it can be hidden depending on the situation. Examples of situations in which the operation instruction image can be hidden depending on the situation include when the game transitions to SP Reach, when the first movable role 33a falls, when the big win symbols are lined up, etc.

Figure 108 (b) shows an example of a screen when transitioning to a high base time-saving state via special miss a. When special miss a occurs during normal gameplay, a notification image stating "Entering jackpot preparation mode!!" is displayed (Figure 108 (b-1)).

The notification image "Entering big win preparation mode!!" is displayed immediately before the display of the variable display in which special miss a occurs is stopped, but it may be displayed in the next variable display after the display in which special miss a occurs.

Figure 108 (b-2) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during variable display in a high base time-saving state transitioned to via special miss a, in which a text image saying "Put your energy into it and hit it to the right!", an operation instruction image consisting of an arrow image pointing to the right, and a text image saying "Preparing for jackpot" are displayed in the display area, and the jackpot preparation mode is executed. Also, the variable display during the jackpot preparation mode is performed by decorative pattern 36 displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display area.

In the jackpot preparation mode, the decorative pattern 36 is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display area, but it may be displayed in the center of the display area with a decorative pattern 36 larger than the size shown in FIG. 108 (b-3), as in the Underwater Temple mode. The jackpot preparation mode continues until a jackpot is achieved or the number of high base time-saving times (J) reaches the upper limit of 100 times.

Figure 108 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when switching to the Underwater Temple mode. Figure 108 (c-1) is an example of the display screen on the 30th spin in the Underwater Temple mode, and is similar to the example screen shown in Figure 108 (a-5). Figure 108 (c-2) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen on the 31st spin onwards in a high base time-saving state that started in the Underwater Temple mode, when the performance mode is "acceleration mode".

In this way, the presentation mode in the high base time-saving state after the end of the jackpot is controlled in "Undersea Temple Mode" during the period in which the variable display is performed for 30 spins after the transition to the high base time-saving state, and is controlled in "Acceleration Mode" during the period in which the variable display is performed from the 31st spin onwards.

As mentioned above, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the high base time-saving state after the end of the jackpot is determined by referring to different fluctuation pattern determination tables for the second special symbol from the first spin to the 30th spin (Fig. 29(a)) and from the 31st spin onwards (Fig. 29(b)). Also, the fluctuation time from the 31st spin onwards is set to be relatively short compared to the fluctuation time from the first spin to the 30th spin.

As a result, during the period controlled in acceleration mode, the time required to complete one variable display is shorter than during the period controlled in underwater temple mode, so gameplay progresses faster than in underwater temple mode.

The reason for speeding up the gameplay in this way from the middle of the high base time-saving state is to reduce the player's frustration when they are unable to win a second-class jackpot during a high base time-saving state where a second-class jackpot is almost guaranteed.

(Training mode effect)
109 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of the training mode presentation of the gaming machine 1. As described above, the training mode presentation is a presentation that is executed over 20 rotations of the variable display from the start of the presentation, and in the final variation (the variation 20 rotations after the start of the training mode presentation), a training mode success presentation (notifying that the sea mode will be switched to) or a training mode failure presentation (notifying that the land mode will continue) is performed. In addition, in the training mode presentation, various chance-up presentations are performed from the start of the variation to the final variation, and the chance-up presentations suggest to the player the expectation that the training mode will be successful in the final variation.

Figure 109 (a) shows an example of the screen when the training mode starts. When the training mode performance starts, the decorative pattern 36 is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the LCD and changes and stops. The LCD shows the remaining number of times according to the training mode change number (TM) in the sub-RAM 120b, and the main character who will be training.

Figure 109 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a chance-up presentation that is performed during the training mode presentation. Figure 109 (b-1) is an example screen in which the main character trains to lift a 10 kg weight, Figure 109 (b-2) is an example screen in which the main character trains to lift a 30 kg weight, and Figure 109 (b-3) is an example screen in which the main character trains to lift a 100 kg weight. The heavier the weight the main character lifts, the more likely it is that a successful training mode presentation will occur in the final variation.

In addition to the types of weights to be lifted mentioned above, there are various other types of chance-up effects, such as another character appearing in the background to cheer on the main character, effect effects displayed near the main character, and background music changes. If any of these are performed, it is more likely that the training mode success effect will occur in the final variation than if they are not performed.

Figure 109 (c) shows the training mode success presentation in the final variation of the training mode presentation. If the training mode is successful, a text image saying "Training mode successful!!" and the main character who has trained and become a size larger are displayed (Figure 109 (c-1)), and then an image announcing the transition to sea mode is displayed (Figure 109 (c-2)).

Figure 109 (d) is a diagram showing a training mode failure presentation in the final variation of the training mode presentation. If training mode fails, a text image saying "Training mode failed" and a weakened main character who has failed training are displayed (Figure 109 (d-1)), followed by an image announcing that ground mode will continue (Figure 109 (d-2)). Note that after the training mode failure presentation, a training mode success presentation using a revival pattern or a jackpot announcement presentation using a revival pattern may be performed.

When a normal reach variation effect is executed during the training mode performance, the normal reach effect is executed by the reduced decorative pattern 36 in the upper left corner, and when a SP reach variation effect is executed, the training mode background image is switched to the SP reach background image, and the same SP reach effect is executed as when the training mode is not executed.

As mentioned above, the training mode success notification effect is executed not only when the normal state is actually transitioned to (when the true training mode setting flag is set), but also when the low base time-saving state continues (when the false training mode setting flag is set) (steps S1538-1, S1538-2, etc. in FIG. 95).

(Details of this embodiment)
A store that uses the gaming machine 1 for business turns on the power supply of the gaming machine 1 a predetermined time before the store's opening time and cuts off the power supply of the gaming machine 1 a predetermined time after the store's closing time. As described above, the gaming machine 1 backs up the game information in the main RAM 110b when the power supply is cut off (step S20-9 in FIG. 40, etc.), and restores the backed up game information to the main RAM 110b when the power supply is restored (step S10-16 in FIG. 38, etc.). Thus, the game information in the main RAM 110b of the gaming machine 1 at the start of business hours is the backed up game information in the main RAM 110b at the end of the previous day's game.

As described above, when power is restored, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command and a game state instruction command to the performance control unit 120m according to the game state at the time of restoration (steps S10-19, S10-27, etc. in FIG. 38).

Therefore, when the power is restored, if the game state at the time of power interruption was normal, the performance control unit 120m will receive a command from the main CPU 110a indicating the normal state, and if the game state at the time of power interruption was low base time-saving state, the performance control unit 120m will receive a command from the main CPU 110a indicating the low base time-saving state.

In addition, in the command analysis process, when the performance control unit 120m receives a power-on/restore command corresponding to a low base time-saving state, it sets the special background image setting flag in the main RAM 110b (e.g., step S1507 in FIG. 86), but does not set the special background image setting flag in the main RAM 110b when it receives a power-on/restore command corresponding to a normal state (e.g., step S1506 in FIG. 86).

Furthermore, in the background image display control process, when the special background image setting flag in the main RAM 110b is set, the performance control unit 120m refers to the special background setting table (Figure 97 (b)) stored in the main ROM 110c, and displays the underwater background image of the sea mode not only in the normal state but also in the low base time-saving state (step S1515-4 in Figure 98).

In other words, when power is restored, the gaming machine 1 will display an underwater background image corresponding to the sea mode, regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of power restoration is normal or low base time-saving.

The special background variation count (P), which is set to a value of 30 when the power is restored, is decremented by 1 for each variation. When P reaches 0 (when 30 variations have been displayed since the power was restored), or when a variation presentation pattern that indicates a transition to ground mode (such as variation presentation pattern 77 in FIG. 90) is selected, the special background image setting flag is cleared (such as step S1544 in FIG. 88), and a background image corresponding to the current game state is displayed (step S1515-3 in FIG. 98).

In other words, when the power is restored, the gaming machine 1 displays the underwater background image of the sea mode in either the low base time-saving state or the normal state, and may display the underwater background image of the sea mode in either the low base time-saving state or the normal state for a maximum of 30 rotations of variable display after the power is restored.

As shown in the explanation of the game flow using Figure 6, the normal state of the gaming machine 1 is more advantageous than the low base time-saving state in terms of the ease of transitioning to the high base time-saving state. Therefore, if a background image corresponding to the current game state is displayed when the power is restored, there is a possibility that the operating status of the gaming machine 1 in the low base time-saving state at the start of the store's business hours will be lower for the gaming machine 1 in the low base time-saving state than for the gaming machine 1 in the normal state. However, in the gaming machine 1, all gaming machines 1 whose power has been restored display a background image in the sea mode, which is likely to be in the normal state, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in operation at the start of business hours and a bias in the gaming machines played by players.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 1 is vacant during business hours with a terrestrial background image displayed, the store manager can shut off and restore the power to the gaming machine 1 to display the underwater background image in sea mode. Thus, the gaming machine 1 can create a situation in which players are eager to play, simply by shutting off and restoring the power.

As mentioned above, after the special play ends in the low base time-saving state, the game state returns to the normal state at B for the first type 2R, and the low base time-saving state continues at C for the first type 2R (Figure 6).

Then, in the low base time-saving state, the presentation mode after the end of the first type 2R win B is the sea mode, which corresponds to the normal game state (step S1515-3 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, in the low base time-saving state, the presentation mode after the end of the first type 2R win C is the sea mode, not the land mode, which corresponds to the low base time-saving game state (step S1515-4 in FIG. 98).

Therefore, in the case of the first type 2R win B and the first type 2R win C, which are established in the low base time-saving state, if the same fluctuation effect and the same jackpot effect are used for the jackpot fluctuation and during the jackpot, in both cases the jackpot will end in sea mode, making it difficult for the player to accurately grasp whether the game state after the jackpot ends is normal state or low base time-saving state.

Therefore, even if the gaming machine 1 enters a low base time-saving state after the end of a jackpot, the execution of the sea mode can give the player a sense of expectation that the game may be transitioning to a normal state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, even if the gaming machine 1 enters sea mode after the end of a jackpot and it is difficult to determine whether the game is in normal mode or low base time-saving mode, the game may be played in sea mode even if the game state is in low base time-saving mode until a maximum of 30 rotations of variable display are displayed after the end of the jackpot (e.g., steps S1542 to S1544 in FIG. 88).

Therefore, even if the gaming machine 1 is in a low base time-saving state immediately after the end of a jackpot, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing as long as the sea mode continues, and since it is possible to reduce the chances of ending play immediately after the end of a jackpot, it is possible to improve operation after the end of a jackpot.

The condition for ending the display of the sea mode background image immediately after the end of a jackpot in a low base time-saving state is that the 30-spin variable display ends, or a variable presentation pattern (such as variable presentation pattern 77) that notifies the player of a transition to land mode is selected, but the condition may be a predetermined lottery result other than the number of variable displays and the variable presentation pattern, or a combination of the passage of a predetermined number of variable displays and a predetermined lottery result.

Furthermore, the underwater background image displayed immediately after the end of a jackpot in a low base time-saving state may be made to be more likely to display a deep sea background image than a shallow water background image when the game state is normal, and more likely to display a shallow water background image than a deep sea background image when the game state is in a low base time-saving state, thereby suggesting which game state is more likely to be the actual game state.

In addition, the underwater background image displayed from immediately after the end of a jackpot in a low base time-saving state until the end of the 30-spin variable display may be such that a deep sea background image is more likely to be displayed than a shallow sea background image when the game state is normal, and such that a shallow sea background image is more likely to be displayed than a deep sea background image when the game state is in a low base time-saving state, thereby suggesting which game state is more likely to be the actual game state.

When the gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the low base time-saving state, it transitions to the high base time-saving state by consuming 800 fluctuations (L) (e.g., step S330-18 in FIG. 50). However, displaying the fluctuations for 800 spins requires loaned balls worth 40,000 yen, even if a 20-spin fluctuation display is performed using loaned balls obtained for 1,000 yen, which places a considerable burden on the player.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is in a low base time-saving state, by using up the low base time-saving number of times (B) a specified number (100 times, 200 times, 400 times, 600 times), it transitions to a normal state in which it is easier to transition to a high base time-saving state than to a low base time-saving state (e.g., step S330-20 in FIG. 50). The above benefits are easier to achieve than displaying a fluctuation of 800 spins, so it is possible to encourage the player to play aggressively even when the number of fluctuations (L) after the end of a jackpot is still small.

As shown in the game flow in Figure 6, the trigger for transitioning from the low base time-saving state to the normal state is the consumption of the specified number of low base time-saving times (B), the occurrence of a first-type 10R jackpot A, and the occurrence of a first-type 10R jackpot B.

From the jackpot probability (1/300) shown in Figure 18(a) and the jackpot distribution in Figure 19(a), the probability that A occurs per 10R of the first type is 10/30000 (=1/3000), and the probability that B occurs per 2R of the first type is 40/30000 (=1/750). Therefore, it is unlikely that A per 10R of the first type or B per 2R of the first type will occur before the specified number of variable displays (100, 200, 400, 600) have been consumed. Therefore, the main route from the low base time-saving state to the normal state is the consumption of the specified number of low base time-saving times (B).

Therefore, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a training mode presentation that indicates to the player whether or not the specified number of low base time-saving times (B) is about to be consumed, making it possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player as to whether or not the specified number of low base time-saving times (B), which is the main route from the low base time-saving state to the normal state, will be consumed.

In addition to the training mode effect that notifies the player of a transition to sea mode after completion, by executing a training mode effect (fake training mode effect) that notifies the player that land mode will continue after completion of the effect, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing while creating a sense of expectation in the player even when the number of remaining fluctuations until the transition from the low base time-saving state to the normal state is between 220 and 200, and between 420 and 400.

Furthermore, even if the fake training mode effect is executed, after the fake training mode effect ends, the number of remaining changes until the transition to the normal state (the number of remaining changes until the number of changes (L) reaches 800 spins) is less than before the fake training mode effect started, so the player can be expected to continue playing even after the fake training mode effect ends.

The start conditions for the training mode effect are the number of remaining changes from the low base time-saving state to the normal state, which are 20, 220, and 420, but the conditions can also be determined by a predetermined lottery rather than being determined solely based on the number of changes. Even when the start conditions for the training mode effect are set in this way, it is believed that players are less likely to interrupt play during the training mode effect, making it possible to improve operation.

The start condition of the training mode presentation may be triggered by the result of a jackpot determination made by the advance determination means. In that case, the training mode presentation will not continue for 20 times, and a jackpot will be announced in the variable presentation of the reserved ball that was the subject of the pre-reading.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 provides a case where, at the end of the training mode presentation, even if the low base time-saving number of times (B) has not been consumed the specified number of times and the game does not transition to the normal state, the training mode success presentation is executed and the game transitions to the sea mode (steps S1538-1, S1538-2, S1538-3, etc. in FIG. 95).

Therefore, even if the low base time-saving state does not actually transition from the low base time-saving state to the normal state and the low base time-saving state continues, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the game by performing a training mode success presentation and transitioning to sea mode. Furthermore, by executing a training mode success presentation even if the low base time-saving state actually continues, it is possible to increase the expectation that a success presentation will be performed by the training mode presentation, and to increase the player's anticipation for the game during the training mode presentation.

In addition, even if the game returns to the low base time-saving state after transitioning to the normal state (transitioning from sea mode to land mode), the player is more likely to continue playing after that because the number of fluctuations (L) is closer to 800 spins than when the game was being played in the low base time-saving state with the aim of playing the specified number of times for the low base time-saving number of times (B) before transitioning to the normal state.

In the game flow of the gaming machine 1, after a jackpot due to the second special symbol ends in the high base time-saving state, the game state will either return to the high base time-saving state or transition to the normal state. Therefore, even when transitioning from the high base time-saving state, which is the most advantageous game state, to the normal state, it is possible to play in a game state that is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state than the low base time-saving state. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 can increase the possibility that the player will continue playing without quitting immediately after the high base time-saving state ends.

As shown in the game flow in Figure 11, the trigger for transitioning from the normal state to the high base time-saving state is the occurrence of C for 2R of the first type, D for 10R of the first type, and the occurrence of special miss a.

From the jackpot probability (1/300) shown in Figure 18(a) and the jackpot distribution in Figure 19(a), the probability of C occurring in 2R of the first type is 40/30000 (=1/750), and the probability of D occurring in 10R of the first type is 10/30000 (=1/3000). On the other hand, from the special miss probability (1/10) shown in Figure 18(a) and the special miss distribution in Figure 20(a), the probability of a special miss is 20/1000 (=1/50).

The main route from the normal state to the high base time-saving state is the establishment of special miss a, so the effect that has the possibility of establishing special miss a is the effect that will most likely heighten the player's expectations in the normal state. And the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a roulette effect and a battle effect as effects that have the possibility of establishing special miss a.

The roulette and battle effects not only notify you when special miss a occurs, which triggers a transition to a high base time-saving state, but also when special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d occur, which trigger a transition to a low base time-saving state, and when a normal miss occurs, which causes normal mode to continue.

The battle effects and roulette effects not only notify the player of whether or not they will transition to a high base time-saving state, but may also notify the player of a transition to a low base time-saving state, making the player feel both hope and anxiety at the same time and increasing the player's excitement about the game.

In addition, the battle effects not only notify the player of the occurrence of special misses and normal misses, but also of the occurrence of a jackpot, which not only creates a sense of anticipation and anxiety in the player about the transition in game state, but also creates an increased sense of anticipation of winning a jackpot, further increasing the player's excitement about the game.

Furthermore, the battle performance is a battle victory performance when the game transitions to a high base time-saving state, a battle draw performance when the normal state continues, and a battle defeat performance when the game transitions to a low base time-saving state. Therefore, the battle performance can clearly inform the player of the complex game state transitions and the establishment of a jackpot, which are caused by four types of special misses, four types of jackpots, and normal misses, through the battle result performance.

Furthermore, the battle victory presentation when special miss a occurs can only be executed when the current game state is normal, and is not executed when the game is in low base time-saving state or high base time-saving state (Figures 89 and 90). Also, in the battle victory presentation when special miss a occurs, a jackpot pattern combination of 1 or 5 symbols is displayed as a static display. Also, in both the normal state and the low base time-saving state, the jackpot pattern combination is displayed as a static display in the jackpot fluctuation presentation.

Therefore, since the jackpot symbol combination is only displayed in the normal state when the special miss a occurs, the jackpot symbol combination is more likely to be displayed in the normal state than in the low base time-saving state.

When a special miss a occurs in normal mode and the game transitions to the high base time-saving state, unlike when the game transitions to the high base time-saving state via a jackpot, the jackpot performance is not executed, so the player may be disappointed even if the game transitions to the high base time-saving state, which is the most advantageous game state the player desired.

This is because what the player wants is not just to move to the high base time-saving state, but also to win balls through a jackpot (a prize ball resulting from a game ball entering the opened first large prize slot 16/second large prize slot 17), and so when moving to the high base time-saving state via a jackpot, both of these can be satisfied, but when moving to the high base time-saving state via special miss a, only the move to the high base time-saving state has occurred and no balls have yet been won through a jackpot.

Therefore, when displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high base time-saving state after the establishment of the special miss a, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a fluctuation pattern determination table (Fig. 29(b)) in which a shortened fluctuation pattern is more likely to be selected than in the high base time-saving state entered via a jackpot, making it easier for a jackpot to occur earlier than in the case of a high base time-saving state entered via a jackpot.

Therefore, in the high base time-saving state that is entered when special miss a occurs, it is possible to inform the player that a jackpot will occur soon without having to confirm through pre-reading that there is a fluctuation in the reserved jackpot that will result in a jackpot, so the presentation mode is named "jackpot preparation mode."

As mentioned above, if the machine transitions to the high base time-saving state, there is a 1/12 chance of a Type 2 jackpot occurring, so transitioning to the high base time-saving state is essentially a state in which a jackpot can be won. Therefore, if it were too easy to transition to the high base time-saving state, the gaming machine would be too advantageous to the player, so in terms of ball output design, it is not desirable to make the probability of transitioning to the high base time-saving state too high. Also, since it is easier to transition to the high base time-saving state in the normal state than in the low base time-saving state, the probability of transitioning to the high base time-saving state, especially in the normal state, should not be made higher than necessary.

Furthermore, when a RAM clear is executed, the game state is set to the normal state, so if a store executes a RAM clear before opening for business, the game state at the start of business will be the normal state. For this reason, if the probability of transitioning from the normal state to the high base time-saving state is made higher than necessary, a problem will arise in which a store will suffer a disadvantage by executing a RAM clear.

As mentioned above, the main route to transition from the normal state to the high base time-saving state is the occurrence of special miss a. Also, the main route to transition from the normal state to the low base time-saving state is the occurrence of special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d. Therefore, if the selection rate of special miss a is higher than the selection rate of special miss b, special miss c, and special miss d, the probability of transitioning to the high base time-saving state becomes too high.

The selection rate of special miss a when a special miss occurs is set to 20/100 (20%), as shown in the special miss symbol determination table in Figure 20(a).

The selection rate for special miss a when a special miss occurs is set to 20%, but it does not necessarily have to be 20%. As long as it is at least less than 50%, it is believed that problems with ball delivery design are unlikely to occur.

In the normal state or low base time-saving state, a premium preview may be executed as a preview effect that is executed only in the jackpot variable effect that transitions to the high base time-saving state. Examples of premium previews include the display of a premium character, the display of a special cut-in effect, special sound effects, special actions of movable parts, rainbow light emission from the lighting device for the effect, special light emission or special actions of the effect button (vibration, protruding action, etc.), etc.

Also, the jackpot that transitions to the high base time-saving state occurs when a first type 2R C or a first type 10R D occurs in the normal state, and when a first type 10R D occurs in the low base time-saving state. Therefore, the selection rate of variable effects that can execute the premium preview effect is higher in the normal state than in the low base time-saving state, making it easier to execute the premium preview effect in the normal state than in the low base time-saving state.

The premium preview effect may be executed not only in the jackpot fluctuation that transitions to the high base time-saving state, but also in the miss fluctuation effect that transitions to the high base time-saving state. Specifically, a premium preview effect may be set that is executed only when a special miss a occurs in the normal state.

The premium preview effect that is executed in this case may be an effect exclusive to the special miss a, different from the premium preview that guarantees a big win, or it may be a common premium preview effect. In the latter case, the player will know that the special miss a has occurred when the premium preview effect appears and the miss stops.

Also, when a preview performance is executed to notify a reach confirmation immediately after the start of a fluctuation or during the first half of the fluctuation performance when it is still unknown whether or not a reach will be reached, the miss may be stopped without a reach being reached only in the fluctuation performance in which a special miss a occurs in the normal state. In this case, the player can enjoy the excitement of "hoping that the reach will not be reached (hoping that special miss a occurs)" before "enjoying whether or not a jackpot will be announced by the reach performance."

Similarly, in the case of a variable presentation that is the subject of a pre-reading notice when a pre-reading notice is executed to notify a confirmed reach or SP reach, it may be possible not to make the reach ready or not to develop it into an SP reach only in the case of a variable presentation in which a special miss a occurs in the normal state.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal state on the condition that a small win or a big win is not won before the maximum number of 100 variable displays in the high base time-saving state is performed ("YES" in step S310-16, step S310-20, etc.). In addition, when the gaming state transitions to the normal state as described above, the presentation mode is controlled in the sea mode.

However, when the high base time-saving state transitions to the normal state under the above conditions, the presentation mode may be switched to a dedicated presentation mode instead of the sea mode. For example, by switching the presentation mode to a special presentation mode such as a "revival chance mode", a special presentation mode may be executed that suggests that although the game state has fallen from the high base time-saving state, the current game state is a game state (normal state) that is likely to transition to the high base time-saving state.

In addition, in the "Revival Chance Mode", when special miss a, special miss b, special miss c, or special miss d occurs, a roulette effect or battle effect similar to that in the "Sea Mode" may be performed, or a chance effect may be performed to tease the transition to a game state exclusive to the "Revival Chance Mode".

In addition, the transition of the presentation mode to the "Revival Chance Mode" can be made conditional not only on not winning a small or big win before the maximum number of 100 variable displays in the high base time-saving mode has been reached, but also on winning a special game (e.g., a Type 2 9R win J) that transitions to the normal mode after the special game ends.

Furthermore, the transition of the presentation mode to the "Revival Chance Mode" may be performed when the game state transitions to the normal state ("NO" in step S350-14, step S350-15D, etc.) due to the game ball not entering the specific area 19B during a small win that triggers a transition to a special game (for example, a second type 9R win H) that transitions to a high base time-saving state after the special game ends.

In addition, when the power is restored, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays an underwater background image corresponding to the sea mode whether the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the normal state or the low base time-saving state, but whether the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the normal state or the low base time-saving state, a terrestrial background image corresponding to the terrestrial mode suggesting that the gaming state is the low base time-saving state may also be displayed. Note that the above-mentioned case where the "game state at the time of power restoration is the normal state" also includes the case where the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on.

The above-mentioned "game state when power is restored is normal" also includes the case where the game state is normal after transition from the high base time-saving state. In other words, even if the game state is switched off and on when the game state transitions from the high base time-saving state to the normal state and the presentation mode is the "revival chance mode," the presentation mode after power is switched on may be set to ground mode, and the background image after power is switched on may be a ground background image corresponding to the ground mode.

In the above case, even if the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is in a normal state in which it is easy to transition to a high base time-saving state, the gaming state can be concealed from the player by controlling the presentation after powering on or clearing the RAM, by displaying a presentation indicating that the gaming state is in a ground mode, which suggests that the gaming state is in a low base time-saving state, and therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as excessive fighting among players for gaming machines at the start of business.

As described above, according to the first embodiment of the gaming machine 1, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a pattern display means for displaying a stopped pattern as a result of playing, a main control means for controlling the transition of the gaming state, including the first normal state, the second normal state, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and the progress and stop of the game accompanied by the granting of virtual gaming media, and a virtual gaming media number control means for performing processing related to the subtraction and addition of the number of playable virtual gaming media and transmitting gaming state information based on the gaming state to the connected card unit, and includes at least a special gaming state that can be generated by a predetermined pattern being stopped on the pattern display means in the first normal state and the second normal state, and a specific special gaming state that can be generated in the specific gaming state by the stopping of a specific pattern on the pattern display means and the establishment of a specific condition, and in the first normal state, when a special pattern is stopped on the pattern display means, the first normal state can be maintained, and In the first normal state, when the predetermined symbol stops on the symbol display means, the game can transition to the first normal state or the second normal state after the special game state ends depending on the predetermined symbol that has become the special game state, and the special symbol includes a first special symbol and a second special symbol. In the second normal state, when the first special symbol stops on the symbol display means, the game can transition to the first normal state, and when the second special symbol stops, the game can transition to the first specific game state among the specific game states. In the second normal state, when the predetermined symbol stops on the symbol display means, the game can transition to the second specific game state among the specific game states after the special game state ends depending on the predetermined symbol that has become the special game state, and the change time of the second special symbol in the first specific game state is shorter than the change time of the second special symbol in the second specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The above is the details of the first embodiment. According to this embodiment, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of playing with the gaming machine 1 that has a normal state, a low base time-saving state, and a high base time-saving state.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the flow of the initialization process of the main control board 110 and the flow of the initial setting process of the game ball count control unit 180.

Figure 110 shows a part of a flowchart of the initialization process of the main control board 110 in the second embodiment. The initialization process of the main control board 110 in the second embodiment differs from the initialization process in the first embodiment only in that step S10-17b is added.

Specifically, in the case of the initialization process in the second embodiment, the main CPU 110a sends a RAM clear command to the performance control board 120 in step S10-17, and then sends a game ball count clear command to the game ball count control unit 180 in step S10-17b.

Figure 111 is a diagram showing the initial setting process of the game ball count control unit 180 in the second embodiment. The initial setting process of the game ball count control unit 180 in the second embodiment differs from the initial setting process in the first embodiment only in that step S701-4b has been added.

Specifically, in the case of the initial setting process in the second embodiment, in the process of determining whether or not the game ball count clear SW 180e has been pressed in step S701-4, the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game ball count clear SW 180e has not been pressed (step S701-4 returns "NO"), and then in step S701-4b, determines whether or not a game ball count clear command has been received.

If the game ball count CPU 180a determines in step S701-4b that it has received a game ball count clear command from the main control board 110, it proceeds to step S701-5, and if it determines that it has not received a game ball count clear command from the main control board 110, it proceeds to step S701-6.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power-on operation is performed by clearing the main control board RAM as shown in (b-1) and (b-2) of FIG. 17, the gaming machine 1 is controlled as follows.

During the initialization process, the main CPU 110a sends a game ball count clear command from the main control board 110 to the game ball count control unit 180 (step S10-17b).

When the game ball count CPU 180a receives a game ball count clear command from the main control board 110 during the initial setting process (step S701-4b "YES"), it clears the entire area of the game ball count RAM 180b (step S701-5).

As described above, when the main control board 110 is powered off in a low base time-saving state, and then the power is turned on while the RAM clear SW 111a is pressed, the entire area of the main RAM 110b of the main control board 110 is cleared, and the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is also cleared.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in that the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 is different. Figure 112 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 in the third embodiment.

As can be seen by comparing FIG. 72, which shows the game notification control process of the first embodiment, with FIG. 112, which shows the game notification control process of the third embodiment, the game notification control process of the third embodiment does not have the process of step S880-10 in the first embodiment, and step S880-2c is performed instead of the process of step S880-2, step S880-5c is performed instead of the process of step S880-5, and step S880-9c is performed instead of the process of step S880-9.

In step S880-2c, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. Specifically, if one or more game balls have been fired between the previous game notification control process and the current game notification control process, causing the game ball count counter value in the game ball count RAM 180b to be decremented, the determination process in this step will be "YES", and if the game ball count counter value in the game ball count RAM 180b has not been decremented, the determination process in this step will be "NO".

If the game ball count CPU 180a determines in step S880-2c that the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented, it clears the absence flag storage area in the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-3), and if it determines that the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has not been decremented, it performs an absence notification mode determination process (step S880-16).

In step S880-5c, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a start winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that a start winning designation command has been received, it proceeds to step S880-6, and if it determines that a start winning designation command has not been received, it proceeds to step S880-8.

In step S880-9c, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. Note that the method of determining whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented is the same as in step S880-2c described above.

If the game ball count CPU 180a determines in step S880-9c that the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented, the process proceeds to step S880-11, and if the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has not been decremented, the process proceeds to step S880-13.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the control until the setting and clearing of the away flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, the setting and clearing of the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b, and the setting and clearing of the game interruption determination timer counter are performed differs from that of the first embodiment.

As described above, when the display control of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 is being performed in the seating notification mode (step S880-4), if it is determined that a start winning command has been received from the main control board 110 (step S880-5c: "YES"), the game interruption determination flag is set (step S880-6), and the game interruption determination timer counter is set to "600000" (step S880-7).

If no game ball is subsequently released ("NO" in step S880-9c) and no initial winning occurs for 10 minutes (600,000 ms) ("NO" in step S880-13), the game interruption determination flag is cleared (step S880-14) and the absent flag is set (step S880-15). Then, in the next game notification control process, if no game ball has been released ("NO" in step S880-2c), an absent notification mode determination process is performed, and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the seated notification mode to the absent notification mode (step S880-16).

If the game ball is subsequently released ("YES" in step S880-2c), it is determined that play has resumed, the absent flag is cleared (step S880-3), a seated notification mode determination process is performed (step S880-13), and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the absent notification mode to the seated notification mode.

Therefore, when the game ball counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game ball count control unit 180 does not launch game balls, and when a predetermined time has passed since the start condition for the last special pattern was met, changes the notification mode of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in that the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 is different. Figure 113 is a diagram showing the flow of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 in the fourth embodiment.

In step S880-1d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not the away flag is set in the away flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the away flag is set, it proceeds to step S880-2d, and if it determines that the away flag is not set, it proceeds to step S880-5d.

In step S880-2d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been decremented, it advances processing to step S880-4d, and if it determines that the value of the game ball count counter has not been decremented, it advances processing to step S880-3d.

In step S880-3d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been incremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been incremented, it advances processing to step S880-4d, and if it determines that the value of the game ball count counter has not been incremented, it advances processing to step S880-17d.

In step S880-4d, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the away flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. In step S880-5d, the game ball count CPU 180a executes seating notification mode determination processing. Note that the contents of the seating notification mode determination processing are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In step S880-6d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether or not a game interruption determination flag is set in the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball RAM 180b. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game interruption determination flag is set, it advances processing to step S880-7d, and if it determines that the game interruption determination flag is not set, it advances processing to step S880-12d.

In step S880-7d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been decremented, it advances processing to step S880-9d, and if it determines that the value of the game ball count counter has not been decremented, it advances processing to step S880-8d.

In step S880-8d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been incremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been incremented, it advances processing to step S880-9d, and if it determines that the value of the game ball count counter has not been incremented, it advances processing to step S880-16d.

In step S880-9d, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S880-10d, the game ball count CPU 180a clears the game interruption determination flag storage area in the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S880-11d, the game ball count CPU 180a sets an absent flag in the absent flag storage area in the game ball count RAM 180b, and ends the game notification control process.

In step S880-12d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been decremented, it ends the game notification control process, and if it determines that the value of the game ball count counter has not been decremented, it proceeds to step S880-13d.

In step S880-13d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been incremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been incremented, it ends the game notification control process, and if it determines that the value of the game ball count counter has not been incremented, it proceeds to step S880-14d.

In step S880-14d, the game ball count CPU 180a sets a game interruption judgment flag in the game interruption judgment flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b. Next, in step S880-15d, the game ball count CPU 180a sets the game interruption judgment timer counter of the game ball count RAM 180b to "600000" and ends the game notification control process.

In step S880-16d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the game interruption determination timer counter is greater than 0, it ends the game notification control process, and if it determines that the game interruption determination timer counter is not greater than 0 (is 0), it proceeds to step S880-10d.

The game ball count CPU 180a performs the absence notification mode determination process in step S880-17d and ends the game notification control process. Note that the content of the absence notification mode determination process is the same as that in the first embodiment.

As described above, when the display control of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 is being performed in the seating notification mode (step S880-5d), if the value of the game ball count counter is neither decremented nor incremented, it can be assumed that the game has been suspended ("NO" in step S880-12d and "NO" in step S880-13d), so the game suspension determination flag is set (step S880-14d) and the game suspension determination timer counter is set to "600000" (step S880-15d).

If the game ball counter continues to neither increase nor decrease for 10 minutes (600,000 ms) after that, it is assumed that the player has left the seat ("NO" in step S880-7d, "NO" in step S880-8d, and "NO" in step S880-16d), and the game interruption determination flag is cleared (step S880-10d) and the absent flag is set (step S880-11d). Then, if the game ball counter value is not increased or decreased in the next game notification control process ("NO" in step S880-2d and "NO" in step S880-3d), the absent notification mode determination process is performed, and the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 are changed from the seated notification mode to the absent notification mode (step S880-17d).

After that, when the value of the game ball counter is decremented or incremented, it is considered that play has resumed ("YES" in step S880-2d or "YES" in step S880-3d), so the absent flag is cleared (step S880-4d), a seating notification mode determination process is performed (step S880-5d), and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the absent notification mode to the seating notification mode.

Therefore, when the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the last subtraction or addition to the game ball count counter, the game ball count control unit 180 changes the notification mode of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in that the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 is different. Figure 114 is a diagram showing the flow of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 in the fifth embodiment.

The game notification control process of the fifth embodiment is similar to that of the fourth embodiment, with the difference being that some of the processes of the fourth embodiment are not performed. Specifically, the game notification control process of the fifth embodiment does not perform steps S880-3d, S880-8d, and S880-13d of the fourth embodiment, but the other processes are the same. Below, using FIG. 114, we will explain the parts of the game notification control process of the fifth embodiment that differ from the fourth embodiment.

In step S880-2d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been decremented, it clears the absence flag storage area in the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-4d), and if it determines that the value of the game ball counter has not been decremented, it performs absence notification mode determination processing (step S880-17d).

In step S880-7d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been decremented, it clears the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-9d), and if it determines that the value of the game ball counter has not been decremented, it determines whether the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0 (step S880-16d).

In step S880-12d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been decremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been decremented, it ends the game notification control process, and if it determines that the value of the game ball counter has not been decremented, it sets a game interruption determination flag in the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-14d).

As described above, when the display control of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 is being performed in the seating notification mode (step S880-5d), if the value of the game ball count counter is not decremented, it can be assumed that the game has been suspended (step S880-12d: NO), so the game suspension determination flag is set (step S880-14d) and the game suspension determination timer counter is set to "600000" (step S880-15d).

If the game ball counter continues not to decrease for 10 minutes (600,000 ms) after that, it is assumed that the player has left the seat ("NO" in step S880-7d and "NO" in step S880-16d), so the game interruption determination flag is cleared (step S880-10d) and the absent flag is set (step S880-11d). Then, if the game ball counter value is not decreased in the next game notification control process ("NO" in step S880-2d), the absent notification mode determination process is performed, and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the seated notification mode to the absent notification mode (step S880-17d).

After that, when the value of the game ball counter is decremented, it is assumed that play has resumed ("YES" in step S880-2d), so the away flag is cleared (step S880-4d), a seated notification mode determination process is performed (step S880-5d), and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the away notification mode to the seated notification mode.

Therefore, when the game ball count counter of the game ball count RAM 180b is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the last subtraction of the game ball count counter, the game ball count control unit 180 changes the notification mode of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment only in that the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 is different. Figure 115 is a diagram showing the flow of the game notification control process of the game ball count control unit 180 in the sixth embodiment.

The game notification control process of the sixth embodiment is similar to that of the fourth embodiment, with the difference being that some of the processes of the fourth embodiment are not performed. Specifically, the game notification control process of the sixth embodiment does not perform steps S880-2d, S880-7d, and S880-12d of the fourth embodiment, but the other processes are the same. Below, using FIG. 115, we will explain the parts of the game notification control process of the sixth embodiment that differ from the fourth embodiment.

In step S880-3d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been incremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been incremented, it clears the absence flag storage area in the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-4d), and if it determines that the value of the game ball counter has not been incremented, it performs absence notification mode determination processing (step S880-17d).

In step S880-8d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been incremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been incremented, it clears the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-9d), and if it determines that the value of the game ball counter has not been incremented, it determines whether the game interruption determination timer counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is greater than 0 (step S880-16d).

In step S880-13d, the game ball count CPU 180a determines whether the value of the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b has been incremented. If the game ball count CPU 180a determines that the value of the game ball count counter has been incremented, it ends the game notification control process, and if it determines that the value of the game ball counter has not been incremented, it sets a game interruption determination flag in the game interruption determination flag storage area of the game ball count RAM 180b (step S880-14d).

As described above, when the display control of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31 is being performed in the seating notification mode (step S880-5d), if the value of the game ball count counter is not incremented, it can be assumed that the game has been suspended (step S880-13d: NO), so the game suspension determination flag is set (step S880-14d) and the game suspension determination timer counter is set to "600000" (step S880-15d).

If the game ball counter does not increase for 10 minutes (600,000 ms) after that, it is assumed that the player has left the seat ("NO" in step S880-8d and "NO" in step S880-16d), so the game interruption determination flag is cleared (step S880-10d) and the absent flag is set (step S880-11d). Then, if the value of the game ball counter is not incremented in the next game notification control process ("NO" in step S880-3d), the absent notification mode determination process is performed, and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the seated notification mode to the absent notification mode (step S880-17d).

After that, when the value of the game ball counter is incremented, it is assumed that play has resumed ("YES" in step S880-3d), so the away flag is cleared (step S880-4d), a seated notification mode determination process is performed (step S880-5d), and the game notification lamp 86 and image display device 31 are changed from the away notification mode to the seated notification mode.

Therefore, when the game ball count counter in the game ball count RAM 180b is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the last increment of the game ball count counter, the game ball count control unit 180 changes the notification mode of the game notification lamp 86 and the image display device 31.

The above first to sixth embodiments relate to the invention applied to a pachinko gaming machine, but the invention may also be applied to a pachislot gaming machine. A pachislot gaming machine displays multiple reels and some of the patterns drawn on the multiple reels through a display window, spins all the reels based on a start operation based on the player's operation of a start lever, and stops each reel based on the player's operation of a stop button. Thus, the variable display in pachinko corresponds to the reel's rotation operation, and the stop display in pachinko corresponds to the display of patterns through a display window due to the reel's stopping operation. Also, for example, when the third to sixth embodiments of the present invention are applied to a pachislot gaming machine, it becomes possible to change the notification mode of a predetermined notification means when a predetermined time has passed since the last game process.

1 Gaming machine 2 Gaming board 9 Card unit 14 First start port 15 Second start port 16 First big prize port 17 Second big prize port 20 First special symbol display device 21 Second special symbol display device 31 Image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b Main RAM
110c Main ROM
120 Performance control board 120a Sub-CPU
120b Sub RAM
120c Sub ROM
160 Frame control board 170 Launch control unit 180 Game ball number control unit

Claims (2)

a first special symbol display means and a second special symbol display means for displaying symbols in a stopped state as a result of a game;
a main control means for controlling the transition of game states including a first normal state, a second normal state, a specific game state advantageous to a player, and progress and stop of a game accompanied by the provision of virtual game media, and for generating a gaming machine information notification command including information indicating the game state and the progress and stop of the game ;
a virtual game medium number control means for transmitting a response command to the main control means when the game machine information notification command is received from the main control means, performing processing related to subtraction and addition of the number of playable virtual game media, and transmitting game status information based on the game status to a connected card unit;
the main control means is capable of determining that a communication failure has occurred when it is determined that a situation in which the response command cannot be received has occurred a predetermined number of times in succession, and performing a standby process after transmitting a communication failure occurrence command to the image display device;
The game state includes at least a special game state which can be generated by a predetermined symbol being stopped on the first special symbol display means in the first normal state and the second normal state, and a specific special game state which can be generated by a specific symbol being stopped on the second special symbol display means and the establishment of a specific condition in the specific game state,
In the first normal state, when a special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display means, the first normal state can be maintained;
In the first normal state, when the predetermined symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display means, the state can be shifted to the first normal state or the second normal state after the special game state ends in accordance with the predetermined symbol that has become the special game state;
The special symbols include a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and in the second normal state, when the first special symbol stops on the first special symbol display means, a transition to the first normal state is possible, and when the second special symbol stops, a transition to a first specific game state among the specific game states is possible;
In the second normal state, when the predetermined symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display means, a transition to a second specific game state among the specific game states is possible after the special game state ends in accordance with the predetermined symbol that has become the special game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that a time period during which the patterns fluctuate on the second special pattern display means in the first specific game state is shorter than a time period during which the patterns fluctuate on the second special pattern display means in the second specific game state.
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein the first specific game state can be shifted to the second specific game state after the specific special game state has ended.